JP7005466B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In recent years, the specifications and game methods of gaming machines have been diversified. For example, if a jackpot is hit again within a predetermined period after the jackpot ends, some gaming machines shift to a more advantageous state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-94242

In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may play a game without knowing it well, and the player may lose an advantageous right.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the loss of advantageous rights.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state.
An operating means provided so that the initialization process can be executed based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.
A specific information storage means capable of storing specific information indicating that the operation means has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and a specific information storage means.
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value setting process for setting a set value related to a probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, the specific operation means is not determined to have been operated for each process. A process execution means that executes a process based on the determination that the information is stored, and
After the processing by the processing execution means is completed, the first variable display means that variably displays the identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area and derives and displays the display result.
After the processing by the processing execution means is completed, the second variable display means that variably displays the identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second start area and derives and displays the display result.
A hold storage means for storing hold information related to variable display of identification information that has not yet been started,
A state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the second starting region than in the normal state.
A promotion notification means capable of executing a promotion notification for promoting the passage of the game medium to the second starting region during a predetermined period controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. Equipped with a means of notification,
The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification in the first aspect when the identification information is variably displayed by the first variable display means in the predetermined period, and the identification by the second variable display means in the predetermined period. When the information is variablely displayed, the promotion notification is executed in a second aspect different from the first aspect .
The arrival notification means is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information after the end of the advantageous state and the variable display of the first identification information after the end of the advantageous state. In some cases, the arrival notification is executed in a different manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state.
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result.
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4, etc.) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. Reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes notification (output of "arrival", etc.), and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 43 (D) and 43 (F)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period .

(2) The gaming machine according to (1).
After the end of the advantageous state, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 11 times, etc.) equal to or greater than the upper limit number, the advantageous state (via small hit 11 (10) R time reduction, large hit, and via small hit 6) (5) When controlled to (5) R time reduction and big hit, etc.), it is possible to control to a special state (chance time B, etc.) after the end of the advantageous state.

(3) Means 1 The gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The promotion notification means executes promotion notification by temporarily stopping identification information (promotion notification symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
With other winning devices (first starting winning opening 13, etc.) that can start variable display in the variable display device by winning a prize in the game medium,
Among the variable displays that can be started by winning the game medium in the other winning device, other holding storage means (first holding storage buffer, etc.) that stores the holding information for the variable display that has not been started yet. When,
The execution time (2000 ms, etc.) of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the other hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state is based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state. It is shorter than the execution time (60,000 ms, etc.) of the variable display to be executed.
The promotion notification means is another promotion notification (“right-handed”) different from the promotion notification during execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the other hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state. Output etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute other promotion notifications according to a short variable display time.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
The predetermined period is a period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state.

(6) The gaming machine according to (5).
When it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information first executed after the advantageous state (when the holding sequence is determined), the arrival notification means is the arrival notification. Notify in a specific mode different from the notification mode (output "Congratulations", etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state according to a specific aspect. You can enhance the feeling.

(7) The gaming machine according to (5).
The arrival notification means executes arrival notification by temporarily stopping the identification information (arrival notification symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7).
The variable display device has a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of identification information (blue 7, red 7, promotion notification symbol, arrival notification symbol, blank symbol, etc.) on the surface thereof, and the plurality of times. By rotating the body, a plurality of display areas are formed in which the plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated.
When the remaining time of the predetermined period is less than or equal to a specific time (15 seconds or the like), the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means has reached the upper limit of the reserved information that can be stored by the reserved storage means. At that time, the arrival notification means executes the arrival notification by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform arrival notification while ensuring the stop operation time of the rotating cylinder.

(9) A first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, etc.) for performing the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, etc.) and a second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol, etc.). A second variable display means (second special symbol display 8b, etc.) is provided, and the display result in either the first variable display means or the second variable display means is a specific display result (big hit display result, etc.). ), It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) that is advantageous for the player.
A first reserved storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, first reserved storage buffer, etc.) for storing information related to the first variable display by the first variable display means as reserved storage information.
A second reserved storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, second reserved storage buffer, etc.) that stores information related to the second variable display by the second variable display means as reserved storage information.
The second variable display of the second variable display means based on the hold storage information of the second hold storage means is more than the first variable display of the first variable display means based on the hold storage information of the first hold storage means. Priority control means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S52 to S54 in FIG. 12, etc.) that performs control to be executed with priority, and
FIG. 14 (game control microcomputer 560, FIG. 14): S163 to S170, etc.) and
A time-saving remaining number display means (effect display device 9, time-saving remaining number image 96, etc.) for displaying the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time-saving state, and
It is provided with the remaining number display control means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S925 to S929, etc. in FIG. 33-2 (B)) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number.
The time saving control means includes at least the first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display becomes the first number of times (11 times, etc.) in the time saving state, and the time saving state. The time saving state is terminated based on the condition of either one of the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display becomes the second number (7 times, etc.) less than the first number (7 times, etc.). Control microcomputer 560, time saving state setting in FIG. 2, S142 to S151 in FIG. 13),
The remaining number display control means displays the remaining number of times when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. It is possible to control the display so that it is not performed (the setting for erasing the display of the remaining number of time reductions in S912 of FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-2).

According to such a configuration, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(10) A first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, etc.) for performing the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, etc.) and a second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol, etc.). A second variable display means (second special symbol display 8b, etc.) is provided, and the display result in either the first variable display means or the second variable display means is a specific display result (big hit display result, etc.). ), It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) that is advantageous for the player.
A first reserved storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, first reserved storage buffer, etc.) for storing information related to the first variable display by the first variable display means as reserved storage information.
A second reserved storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, second reserved storage buffer, etc.) that stores information related to the second variable display by the second variable display means as reserved storage information.
The second variable display of the second variable display means based on the hold storage information of the second hold storage means is more than the first variable display of the first variable display means based on the hold storage information of the first hold storage means. Priority control means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S52 to S54 in FIG. 12, etc.) that performs control to be executed with priority, and
FIG. 14 (game control microcomputer 560, FIG. 14): S163 to S170, etc.) and
A time-saving remaining number display means (effect display device 9, time-saving remaining number image 96, etc.) for displaying the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time-saving state, and
It is provided with the remaining number display control means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S925 to S929, etc. in FIG. 33-4 (B)) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number.
The time saving control means includes at least the first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display becomes the first number of times (11 times, etc.) in the time saving state, and the time saving state. The time saving state is terminated based on the condition of either one of the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display becomes the second number (7 times, etc.) less than the first number (7 times, etc.). Control microcomputer 560, time saving state setting in FIG. 2, S142 to S151 in FIG. 13),
The remaining number display control means displays the remaining number of times when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. It is possible to control the display without updating (the time saving remaining number update limit display setting of S912A in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-4 (A)).

According to such a configuration, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following (11). Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the effect of production, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

(11) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 43 (D) and 43 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(12) In the gaming machine of (11) above,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the specific period may be made feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 43 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(13) In the gaming machine of (11) or (12) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a preview effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the specific period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(14) In any of the gaming machines (11) to (13) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible and
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (11) to (15) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the specific period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(17) In any of the gaming machines (11) to (16) above,
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 9031A or push button 9031B), and
Further, a specific display executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) for performing a specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 51 (E) and 52 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 52 (J) and 52 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(18) In any of the gaming machines (11) to (17) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 53A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of reaching title production shown in FIG. 53 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 905 and a production control CPU 90120) are further provided.
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (d)) configured including the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (d)).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit determination table and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation example of the 1st and 2nd special symbols in the 1st time saving state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the effect image of a round suggestion effect. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the effect image of the hold continuous notification effect. It is a timing chart of the hold continuous notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data table used when selecting the effect mode of the round number suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the hold ream / round number suggestion effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the round number suggestion effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous notification effect 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process of a hold continuous notification effect. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the effect image of a specific effect. It is a timing chart of a specific production. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process of a specific effect. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device which shows the 1st display control example of the time saving remaining number of times. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer in order to execute the effect display of the number of remaining time reductions shown in FIG. 33-1. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device which shows the 2nd display control example of the time saving remaining number of times. It is a flowchart which shows the process which is executed by the effect control microcomputer in order to execute the effect display of the time saving remaining number of times shown in FIG. 33-3. It is an enlarged view of the display area in the vicinity of the time saving remaining number display part which shows the time saving remaining number update lock display control example. It is a display screen figure of the effect display device which shows the specific notification example. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table and the big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of promotion notification and arrival notification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the reserved number and the notification mode. It is a figure which shows the time saving medium timing chart when there is no special 1 hold. It is a figure which shows the mode of the section A, B, the variable display device in the achievement effect, and the like. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the time saving medium when there is a special 1 hold. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the time saving medium when the right reel is not stopped. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st time reduction change. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 150IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle production setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the puzzle production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the puzzle production mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table, the accessory effect effect decision table, and the light guide plate effect decision table in a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production mode of the puzzle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production mode of the puzzle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production mode of the puzzle production. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a gaming machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 3.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as coin gaming machines may be used.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame (not shown) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game frame that can be opened and closed. It has a glass door frame 2 formed in the shape of a frame.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball tray 4 for storing a game ball as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 3, and when the game ball as a game medium is launched from the hit ball launcher as a hit ball. A hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 to be operated is provided. A game board 6 having a game area 7 on which the driven game ball can flow down is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. In the game area 7, some of the game nails are shown. The hitting ball launching device is driven by a launching motor, and the force for launching the game ball (launching strength) is adjusted according to the rotation operation position of the hitting ball operating handle 5. As a result, the player can shoot the game ball at a desired place in the game area 7.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. In the game area 7, the first path of the flow path in which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front, and the first of the flow paths in which the game ball flows down. A second route different from the first route is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to make the game ball flow down to the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to allow the game ball to flow down to the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the left side of the game area 7, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route may be referred to as a right-handed route because the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the right side of the game area 7.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, and the like.

The game ball launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball striking operation handle 5 and driven into the game area 7 is guided along, for example, an array of game nails when guided to the left game area. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the left game area.

The first start winning opening 13 is provided as a structure through which a game ball divided into the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9. The first start winning opening switch 13a is provided inside the first starting winning opening 13a as a switch for detecting the entered game ball.

A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V-determined winning device 87 are provided as a structure in which a game ball hit into the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning opening 14 in which a game ball can be won. Further, as a switch for detecting the game ball that has entered each of them, a gate switch 32a is inside the gate 32, and a second start winning opening switch 14a is inside the second starting winning opening 14. Inside the 87, a V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharging switch 15b are provided, respectively. Hereinafter, the winning (entry) of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 13 is also referred to as the first starting winning, and the winning (entry) of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14 is also referred to as the second starting winning.

A game ball (starting winning ball) enters (winning) in the first starting winning opening 13 as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) It is a possible winning opening structure. A game ball (starting winning ball) enters (winning) in the second starting winning opening 14 as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) It is a possible winning opening structure.

The gate 32 is a gate structure through which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that the game ball is guided to the first starting prize opening 13 of the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening 13, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second starting prize opening 14 and the gate 32 of the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that the game ball struck in the right game area may enter the first start winning opening 13, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is struck in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls will enter them. On the contrary, the game ball struck in the left game area may enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls struck in the game area will enter them.

The V determination winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a large hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-determination winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes through the inside. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows a game ball to pass in the front-rear direction at the upper part, and walls are provided on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A portion is provided, and a taxiway through which the game ball is guided is formed along the passage. At the center of the guideway, when a small hit occurs, for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 times opening period + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating port is formed as an opening in which a total of about 10 or more game balls can win a prize within a predetermined period of opening. The passage of the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball alternately on both sides of the wall portion, so that when hitting to the right. , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) is formed in which the game ball slowly flows in the passage on the operation port on the upper part of the V determination winning device 87.

In the small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 is used for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period elapses. Open control is executed. During such an open control period, the round number suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20 and the hold continuous notification effect shown in FIG. Specific effects are feasible. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the taxiway where the actuation port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable portion 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a taxiway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the taxiway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port opens in the taxiway, so that the game ball guided to the taxiway can fall from the operating port into the inside of the V determination winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating opening), the V-winning area 870 as a specific area is the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning area in which the game ball entering from the operating opening can win. Further, there is provided a ramp 871 that guides all the game balls that have entered from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 by a tilted path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening through which the game ball can enter, and the gaming ball entered from the V winning opening can be guided downward.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-shaped opening / closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state is provided. There is. The opening / closing member is driven by the solenoid 24, and can move forward / backward to open / close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 passes over the opening / closing member and opens in the vicinity of the downstream side of the V winning area 870. It is provided in the above and is in a state where it can fall into the winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and one game ball is in a small hit gaming state in which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened. When the player enters the V winning area 870 and wins a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a provided in the V winning area 870. When one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a in the small hit game state, the opening / closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball subsequently guided onto the V winning area 870 is in the winning ball area. Will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, as for the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a and the V-judgment winning switch 15b reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87 opened in the small hit gaming state closes the operating port and the game ball enters. It is considered impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to meet at the bottom, and the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is a predetermined game board 6 inside. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V-determination discharge switch capable of detecting the game balls to be discharged, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, the game ball wins in the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , The condition for generating a big hit is satisfied, and the game is controlled to a big hit game state. Such winning of a game ball in the V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 gaming balls in total are not required and no special operation is required. The structural design and control design are designed so that the player can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and when the gaming ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the gaming ball is always (100%) in the V-winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-handed promotion notification for instructing right-handed is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V determination winning device 87. To.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, during the opening period of the operating opening of the V-judgment winning device 87, unless the player does not fire the game ball or the player hits the left side, hit the right side. If so, the (100%) game ball will surely enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In this embodiment, an example in which the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a deceleration structure for a game ball is shown. However, without providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port capable of dropping the game ball is provided in a part of the taxiway of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87, and the game ball is provided during the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration in which the operating port is opened 10 times may be used.

A V lamp 875, which is a light emitting body made of an LED having a character shape of "V", is provided on a part of the front side of the V determination winning device 87. The V lamp 875 is basically emitted in white when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state. The V-lamp 875 is basically capable of emitting light in white, but the emission color can be changed to blue, red, and rainbow colors depending on the effect according to the game situation, such as when notifying a hold ream. Is. The V lamp 875 may be provided on the front portion or inside of the V determination winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Further, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from that of the V determination winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V determination winning device 87).

The variable winning ball device 15 is a variable winning ball device that changes between an advantageous state (open state) for a player who can enter a game ball and a disadvantageous state (closed state) for a player who cannot enter the game ball. A tulip-shaped open wing piece (a pair of left and right shapes) is provided at the entrance, and a stopper member is provided above the open wing piece to limit the entry of the game ball when the open wing piece is closed. Has been done. This open blade piece is driven by a solenoid 16. The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening for a certain period (for example, 1 second) when the display result of the normal symbol is hit. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that the game ball struck in the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V determination winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the game ball may enter either of the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls struck in the right game area will enter them.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of displaying various effects such as an effect corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner as a variable display means for variablely displaying the special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A device 8a and a second special symbol display 8b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them are provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, various images such as the variation display of the effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each are displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (design display area) in which three decorative (also referred to as decorative symbols) effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols) of "left", "middle", and "right" are variablely displayed. Is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display 8b performs the effect display. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, if the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator. If only one special symbol display is provided, only one starting winning opening may be provided. Further, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (plural) starting winning openings are provided, and one special symbol displaying is provided when a game ball wins a prize in any of the starting winning openings. You may control the variable display. In addition, when two (plural) special symbol indicators are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and the two special symbol indicators are variablely displayed in a predetermined order (for example, variable display is made for each start winning prize). (Switching the special symbol display, etc.) may be controlled.

Below the game area 7, a jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided. In the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area due to the planted state of the game nail.

The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided with a jackpot whose front surface is covered with a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, the solenoid 21 tilts the door forward with the bottom as an axis, and the jackpot appears. (Opens). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting the entered game ball is provided. The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 has a winning route with a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can be won in the big winning opening only when the game ball is driven into the right game area. It is restricted. It should be noted that regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening.

When a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the V-judgment winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded accordingly. Is paid out. The prize ball may be paid out even when the game ball passes through the gate 32. Further, at least one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be prevented from being paid out even if the game ball wins.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided in the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The jackpot is when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, respectively. Occurs in. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening 13, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening 14, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b.

The big hit also occurs when the game ball that entered when the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hit gaming state enters the V winning area 870. Hereinafter, when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, it is referred to as V winning. The small hit is a hit at which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value addition, and a big hit can be generated on condition that the V winning is given. In the V-determination winning device 87, the gaming state in which the operating port is open is referred to as a "small hit gaming state". Then, in the small hit game state, the big hit generated based on the V winning of the game ball is called "big hit via small hit". On the other hand, the state of being in a big hit game state based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value addition, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is repeatedly controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is open (the jackpot is opened) is called a round. Repeated continuous control is also called round control.

In the jackpot gaming state, after the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is set to the open state, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has elapsed. It will be closed according to the establishment of the opening end condition) that the winning ball has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball After passing through (including winning) the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as the starting winning area), the start condition of the variable display (for example, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. do. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

Further, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, within a predetermined upper limit number. The storage of information about the variable display for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied is called hold storage. The term reserved storage is also used to indicate (specify) the reserved information. Hold memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 13. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14. When a jackpot occurs in a state where such a first hold memory or a second hold memory exists, the hold memory that existed before the occurrence of the jackpot is maintained as it is, and is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Used for.

When the second start prize is generated in the second start prize opening 14, even if there is a hold memory of the first start prize, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start prize is given priority and executed. Will be done. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second display composed of one indicator that displays the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storage. A special symbol hold storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol holding storage display 18b lights the second special symbol holding storage display 18b every time there is a valid start prize, and every time the variation display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b is turned on. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b is turned off.

Above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a first special symbol hold storage display consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold storage number. A vessel 18a is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of indicators that are lit each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variation display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighting indicators is reduced by one.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a rectangular shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. It is a hit when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), and the variable winning ball device 15 is limited to a predetermined time from a closed state which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by 1. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a stick controller 122 that can be grasped by a player and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right). On the stick controller 122, a predetermined instruction operation is performed by a player holding the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and pressing and pulling the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. Is built-in. Further, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player changes by firing a game ball so as to use "left-handed" aiming at the left game area and "right-handed" aiming at the right game area properly according to the game situation. The game state and the production state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player is seated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 by left-handing. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the game is switched from left-handed to right-handed and aimed at the open big hit variable winning ball device 20. .. After the jackpot game state is completed, a right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a display such as "Aim to the right" is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9.

During the big hit game state, the game is performed in which the open big hit variable winning ball device 20 is aimed by right-handed hitting. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the end of the big hit game state, if the time is shortened, which will be described later, the game is continued by right-handed. After the end of the big hit game, if the time saving state is reached, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, right-handed promotion notification is also performed during the time saving state. If the time is not shortened after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 13 by switching from right-handed to left-handed. Play the game as if you were doing it. If the time is not shortened, a left-handed promotion notification (also called a left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to return to left-handed and play the game. You may.

During the time saving state after the big hit game is completed, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handed. If a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the display result is a big hit (a big hit with a special symbol), the game is performed aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 while hitting right. Further, if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the display result is the small hit display result, the operating opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit gaming state, so that the V is left hit. A game is performed aiming at the judgment winning device 87. At the start of the small hit game state, the small hit start notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state is started. Further, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit is executed before the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened according to the small hit, as will be described later, at a specific timing (depending on the game situation). Right-handed promotion notification is also performed at the start timing of the hit display or a predetermined timing before the small hit display is executed.).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-decision winning area 870, and is detected. When a V prize occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V-winning has occurred. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, the small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the big hit gaming state, so that the player plays a game aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 while hitting right.

Further, when the game is aimed at the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit game state, the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specified area other than the V winning area 870 (not shown). Does not generate a big hit. When the V prize does not occur during the small hit game state as described above, the V prize failure notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V prize has failed. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, the small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, when the reduced working hours state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 while hitting right. When the time saving state is completed, the game is switched from right-handed to left-handed so that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13. At the end of the time reduction state, a time reduction end notification for notifying that the time reduction has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to the left-handed play and play the game are performed.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. In the hit type table, the jackpot generation condition, the control state after the jackpot (game state), the number of open times in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the open time of each round in the jackpot are shown for each hit type. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are: symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 ( 4) R time saving jackpot is provided. The number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened is shown in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit.

The small hit occurs when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning opening 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and the display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit symbol. Judgment as to whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a small hit symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small hit determination of the special symbol). When a small hit occurs, the small hit game state is set, and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 10 and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small hit game state is the same as before the small hit. In the small hit, the prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87 during the small hit game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small hit game state, and about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, a game ball is awarded to the operating port, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning), a big hit occurs. do. Such a big hit via a small hit is called a big hit via a small hit as described above. The big hit via small hit includes 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit. Is done. The small hit linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time saving big hit is called the first small hit. The small hit linked so as to be a 9 (8) R time saving big hit is called a second small hit. The small hit linked so as to be a 5 (4) R time saving big hit is called a third small hit.

On the other hand, a big hit that is directly generated by a variable display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is called a symbol big hit. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot that are directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big hit is generated by the V prize via the symbol big hit directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Includes big hits via small hits. Each jackpot via the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is named as a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in the present embodiment includes opening the jackpot variable winning ball device 20.

Here, the time saving state will be described. The time saving state is an example of a special gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player. The time saving state is a control state in which the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol (effect symbol) is shortened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal state). In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. It will increase.

In the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 is facilitated ( It is controlled to a high base state (higher approach, higher frequency).

Here, the "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of shot balls. The state in which positive control to increase this ratio is performed is the "high base state". On the other hand, the state in which such control is not performed is the "low base state". Such control is realized, for example, as a control for increasing the occurrence of a starting prize that triggers the start of fluctuation of a special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip) can be opened by increasing the opening frequency and the number of times of opening, or by lengthening the opening time of each time. It can be realized as a control that facilitates winning. Such control is also referred to as "electric chew support control". That is, in the high base state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 that triggers the fluctuation of the special symbol is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased and variable. It is a control state in which winning a prize in the winning ball device 15 is facilitated (higher approach, higher frequency). "Denchu support control" is generally called by the abbreviation "Den support", and the abbreviation "Den support" may be used in this embodiment as well.

Further, high-base control (electric chew support control) will be described in detail. High-base control (electric chew support control) is a control that shortens the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (the time from the start of fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (ordinary symbol shortening). Control), control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (ordinary electric accessory) (opening time extension control), and , Control is performed to increase the number of times the variable winning ball device is opened, which triggers the change of the special symbol (control to increase the number of times of opening). When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device, which triggers the change of the special symbol, is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win a prize (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol display 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9).

In addition, the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened four times (4R). For 16 (15) R time saving big hits via small hits, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 16 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 15 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same big hit as the symbol 15R time saving big hit. I feel it is a type. In the 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) on condition of V winning. Is. In the 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 5 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 4 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same big hit as the symbol 4R time saving big hit. I feel it is a type.

The time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 time, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of the end condition of the reduction of working hours such that the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is one is considered that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the end condition of the reduction of working hours that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is continued until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed once, but to display the variation of the second special symbol, It is necessary to hit the right side to allow the game ball to enter the gate 32 to open the variable winning ball device 15, and in that state, to win the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15, such a variable winning ball device 15. It may take a long time to win the game ball, and the first special symbol that has been held and stored may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. It is a condition to ensure that the variable display of the times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times, which is the end condition of the time saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times may generate a jackpot via a small hit as compared with the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be increased.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 7 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of fluctuations is feasible. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is a normal state, the first start winning opening 13 is provided so that a prize can be won from the first path. Therefore, it is better for the game ball to flow down the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of the starting prize than the game ball flowing down the two paths. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 that is opened is provided so that the winning ball can be won from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a big hit than the game ball flowing down. Further, in a specific state such as a small hit game state, the V-determination winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second path. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the second path is the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of generating a big hit than the game ball flowing down.

Not limited to such comparison of advantages, for example, another winning opening (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) is the first route. And the second route, and in the low base state as a normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second route, and the high base state, the big hit game state, and the small From another point of view, such as in other states such as a winning game state, the second path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the first path, and in the normal state, the gaming medium uses the first path. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down on the second path.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 also has a built-in random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by a hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or the whole thereof is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the main board 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the fact that the start winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

Further, the detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V judgment winning switch 15a, and the V judgment discharging switch 15b are used for game control. The input driver circuit 58 given to the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 22 for opening and closing the V determination winning device 87 (movable portion 872), and a V winning determination winning device 87 ( A solenoid 22 for opening and closing the area 870 movable portion 87), a solenoid 24 for opening and closing the V winning area 870 (opening / closing member), and an output circuit 59 driven according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. Has been done. The payout control board 37 controls the payout of balls by controlling the ball payout device 97.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of ordinary symbols, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to controlling the variation display of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and the display control of the V lamp 875 are performed via the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board is performed. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via the 70.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 is detected from the trigger sensor 121 via the I / O port unit 105. input. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the I / O port unit 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operator's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the I / O port unit 105. And enter. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random 1: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 2: Type of big hit (type, symbol 15R time saving big hit, symbol 4R time saving big hit, via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) R time saving big hit, and via small hit 5 (4) One of the types of R time-saving jackpot) and the jackpot symbol are determined (for determining the jackpot type, for determining the jackpot symbol). (3) Random 3: The type (type) of the fluctuation pattern is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 4: The fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 6: The initial value of random 5 is determined (for determining the initial value of random 5).

In this embodiment, as the big hits in the specific gaming state, the symbol 15R time-saving big hit, the symbol 4R time-saving big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R time-saving big hit, the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving big hit, and the small hit It includes multiple types of via 5 (4) R time saving jackpot. Therefore, when a big hit is decided based on the value of the hit determination random number (random R), or when a small hit is decided, it is based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the determined big hit becomes invalid unless a V prize is generated. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined at the same time based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a jackpot symbol.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a small hit symbol.

Further, the variation pattern is included in the variation pattern type determined by first determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). Determine the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type differs depending on whether the display result is out of alignment, the time saving state or the time saving state, so that the time saving state is obtained. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-reduced state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the case of not the time-shortening state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

Further, such fluctuation pattern types include a fluctuation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs (for example, a fluctuation pattern type in which an effect related to the small hit is executed) and a small hit. Contains variable pattern types that cannot be selected (for example, variable pattern types in which an effect that is not related to small hits is executed). Such a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, and includes a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding such a small hit is executed is executed, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs can be selected both when it becomes a small hit and when it does not become a small hit, and when it becomes a small hit, it is better than when it does not become a small hit. Is also set to be selected at a high rate. As a result, even if it is a variation pattern type that can be selected when it becomes a small hit, it may not be a small hit, so that the player is aware in advance that it will be a small hit from the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed. You can prevent it from getting lost. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern type that cannot be selected when it becomes a small hit is, for example, a fluctuation pattern that is not related to the small hit and suggests that it is a direct big hit without going through the small hit. Therefore, by making it unselectable when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the effect of the fluctuation pattern and the display result from becoming complicated. The fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is made is set so that the fluctuation pattern set at a specific fluctuation time is selected based on the correspondence with the open control of the V determination winning device 87. .. If the fluctuation pattern in which such a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed can be executed when the small hit is executed, the player's expectation for the small hit at the time of variable display can be increased. can. Further, the player can easily cope with the game peculiar to the small hit game state that the game ball needs to enter the V determination winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain a big hit. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to escape the advantageous state of allowing the game ball to enter the V determination winning device 87.

Further, the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is made may not be limited to a specific fluctuation time. Further, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs does not have to execute a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern may be provided separately depending on whether the hit is a small hit, a miss, or a big hit. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is not divided into the fluctuation pattern when it becomes a small hit, when it becomes a miss, and when it becomes a big hit, and when any fluctuation display result is obtained, the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected The range of may be the same.

Further, instead of setting the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern separately and determining the fluctuation pattern by the two-step lottery process, the fluctuation pattern is not set and only the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is used in the one-step stage. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

FIG. 5B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure hit determination table. The second special figure hit judgment table is a data table for making a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment for the second special symbol, and a big hit judgment value and a small hit judgment value to be compared with random 1 are set. It is a table that is. The upper part in FIG. 5B is the big hit determination table unit, and the lower part in FIG. 5B is the small hit determination table unit. The "probability" shown in the upper part of FIG. 5B indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a small hit.

When the CPU 56 detects a start winning prize to the first starting winning opening 13 (first starting winning prize) or a starting winning prize to the second starting winning opening 14 (second starting winning prize), the CPU 56 performs a random number at a predetermined timing. The count value (random R) of the circuit 503 is extracted. For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the big hit judgment values, the first special symbol is made a big hit. To decide. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the big hit judgment values, the second special symbol is made a big hit. To decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Deciding to make a small hit also means making a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit (it is described as a tentative decision because it is not controlled by the big hit unless a V prize occurs during the small hit). ..

It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to the big hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but whether to make the stop symbol by the variation display of the second special symbol a small hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not.

The first special symbol is set so as not to be determined to be a small hit, but the first special symbol may be set to be determined to be a small hit with a predetermined probability.

5 (C), 5 (D), and (E) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5C is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 5D is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 for the big hit type determination are "symbol 15R time saving big hit" and "symbol 4R time saving big hit". The jackpot judgment value corresponding to each is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time saving jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (C) and 5 (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "15R time saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the large hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 5 (E), the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2 for determining the large hit type are "via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit" and "small hit". A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "via 9 (8) R time saving big hit" and "via 5 (4) R time saving big hit" is set. However, the big hit types determined in the big hit type determination table via small hits are the first small hit (which is 16 (15) R time saving big hit) and the second small hit (which is 9 (8) R time saving big hit). , It is a provisional big hit type associated with each of the third small hits (5 (4) R time saving big hits), and is invalid unless a V prize is generated in the small hit game state.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, the first time-saving state (variation display 1 to 5 times) and the second time-saving state (variation) in which the number of fluctuation displays controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is different. Due to the existence of a plurality of types of time-saving states such as (display 7 to 11 times), the game in the time-saving state is rich in variety and the interest of the game is improved.

Next, the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of various big hits will be described. Here, a time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit will be described as a representative example. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing in tabular form an example of an execution mode of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit.

4R Time saving After the end of the big hit game state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the first time saving state controlled to the time saving state over a relatively small number of fluctuation display times (1 to 5 times). Regarding the display, comparing the case where the reserved memory of the first special symbol exists before the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and the case where the reserved memory of the first special symbol does not exist before the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. , As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the execution balance mode of the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is different.

FIG. 6A shows an example of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is one hold storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control. FIG. 6B shows an example of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is no hold storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the reserved memory existing before the control to the jackpot gaming state is the jackpot game. The storage state is continued during the state and is carried over to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is used for variable display after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the first special symbol based on the hold memory that existed at the start of the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the 4R time saving jackpot before the control to the jackpot gaming state. When there is a hold memory, the start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 for variable display of the second special symbol to be executed preferentially has not been made yet, so in the time saving state, first, 1 As the second variation display, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the hold storage of the first special symbol carried over from before the occurrence of the big hit game state is executed. In the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the 8R time-saving big hit, a game is performed in which the game ball is entered into the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handedness. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 can be executed.

After the start of the time saving state until the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, when the holding storage of the first special symbol exists, the variable display of the first special symbol is based on the holding storage. Is executed. In FIG. 6A, one of the first special symbols that existed before the control to the jackpot gaming state from the start of the time saving state to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14. An example is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once based on the reserved memory of. In FIG. 6A, it is the second time after the start of the time saving state based on the fact that the variation display based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is executed once after the start of the time saving state. An example in which the time reduction control is completed is shown in the variation display.

As for the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14, four reserved storage information is possible as described above. Therefore, the variable winning ball device 15 in the electric support state, which is executed after the start of the first time saving state and before the end of one execution of the variation display based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, for example. As shown in FIG. 6A, a maximum of four second reserved storage information can be generated during the open control state of. In this embodiment, in the case of the first time saving state, the variable display with a somewhat long variable display time is based on the first start winning to the second start winning opening 14 so that the second reserved storage information is likely to be accumulated. Is executed. It should be noted that such variable display with a long variable display time may not be executed.

After that, when the second reserved storage information is stored until one execution of the variation display based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is completed, for example, the third time in FIG. 6 (A). As shown in the 6th variation display column of the 2nd special symbol, variation display based on a maximum of 4 2nd hold storage information is executed, and a small hit lottery with a winning probability of about 1/7 is held for the second time. It can be executed for the number of stored information. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, the player's expectation can be raised regarding the occurrence of a big hit via the small hit based on the second reserved storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, when there is no hold memory of the first special symbol based on the hold memory that existed before the control to the big hit gaming state at the start of the time saving state, the 4R time saving big hit In a short time after the end of the big hit game state, a right-handed game is performed to allow the game ball to enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting winning opening 13. Since the game state is set, as shown in FIG. 6B, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning from the first variation display to the second start winning opening 14 can be executed. Also in this case, as in the case of having the reserved storage in FIG. 6 (A), a maximum of four second reserved storage information as shown in FIG. 6 (B) can be generated. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, the player's expectation can be raised regarding the occurrence of a big hit via the small hit based on the second reserved storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

As for the end condition of the first time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state of the 4R time reduction jackpot, as described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. It is established when the variation display is executed a total of 5 times.

As shown in FIG. 6A, at the start of the time saving state, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved storage of one of the first special symbols existing at the start is executed once, When the second special symbol variation display is executed for the second time, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and the second special symbol variation display count is executed once, so that the end condition is set. It is established, and the control of the first time saving state is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 6B, when the hold storage of the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed from the first time, 1 Since the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is executed once in the second variation display, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the control of the time saving state is terminated.

4R Time-saving jackpot The end condition of the first time-saving state after the end of the game state is that the number of times the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is once, or the total of the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is set to be established when the number of times is executed 5 times. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 6A, even if the reserved storage of the first special symbol exists at the start of the first time saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the first time saving state. However, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, is executed the same number of times (once) as when the reserved memory of the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the first time reduction state, so that the first time reduction is performed. The state ends.

Further, for example, even if there are a maximum of four reserved memories of the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state, in the first time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the four reserved storages is performed. Is executed, the first special symbol is executed the same number of times (once) as when the reserved storage of the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the first time saving state, so that the first time saving state ends.

In this way, the end condition of the first time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state of the 4R time reduction jackpot is that the number of times the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Since it is set to be established when the total number of times of variation display is executed 5 times, the first special symbol is held and stored at the start of the first time saving state, and the first is not. During the control period of the 1-time reduction state, the number of times the variation display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, can be executed can be the same, so that there is a difference in the advantages and disadvantages for the player in the time-saving state (high base state). This can be prevented and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the maximum number of times the variation display by the first hold storage is performed as the end condition of the first time saving state defined by the total variation display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Since it is set to the total number of times (4 times) and the specific number of times (1 time) that the predetermined variation display is executed for the 2nd special symbol, the variation due to the 1st hold storage in the 1st time saving state. Even if the display is performed a certain number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from having an advantage or disadvantage due to the first reserved storage information, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

For jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the minimum fluctuation display number "1" in the time-saving state in the above-mentioned symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is replaced with "7", and the maximum in the time-saving state in the above-mentioned symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. The variation display count "5" is replaced with "11". Therefore, even in the jackpot type other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the presence or absence of the reserved storage number of the first special symbol at the start of the first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is the same as in the case of the 8R time-saving jackpot. And, regardless of the amount, the second time saving state continues until the same 7 times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed. As a result, for the jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the same effect as that obtained for the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot can be obtained.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the number of time reductions (electric support) after the big hit is set to a relatively small number of times, as described above, the player is determined by the number of first reserved storage information immediately after the end of the big hit game state. It is preferable not to reduce the number of time reductions (electric support) that would be disadvantageous to the user.

7 and 8 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. 7 and 8 show the relationship between the specific command data of the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified content of the command. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 7 and 8 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern to be variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands showing a display result including a missed display result, a big hit type, a big hit display result for each small hit type, and a small hit display result.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special symbol. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening, which indicates the display during the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that the first start prize has been given. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). The command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

The command C0XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating the first hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second hold storage number designation command for designating the second hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a hold storage number designation command for specifying the hold storage number after the subtraction when the hold storage number is subtracted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, a reserved storage number subtraction designation command for specifying the subtraction of the reserved storage number by 1 may be used.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the winning result is a big hit, whether or not the small hit is made, and the determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of winning. Is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C601 (H) is a V-winning designation command for designating that there was a V-winning. The command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command for designating that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) to the V determination winning device 87 has been detected.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is provided with a first hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot, which is a hardware random number (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type, which is a software random number (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and , A random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 55 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot, which is a hardware random number (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type, which is a software random number (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and , A random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and puts them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing). Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored (stored) in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the second hold storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) in the area. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored (stored) in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

In this way, storing information about the start winning prize as described above in the hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the hold storage buffer, but are not stored in advance in the hold storage buffer, but are described later in the variation pattern setting process. It may be extracted at (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). (Update processing of various random numbers such as determination of type and determination of fluctuation pattern), random number update processing for initial value (update processing of initial value of count value of random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination), and the like are executed.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination discharging are performed via the input driver circuit 58. The detection signal of the switch 15b is input, and the state determination thereof is performed (switch processing: S21).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a normal symbol hit and a random number for determining a small hit type used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). ). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start winning port switch 13a, the second starting winning port switch 14a, and the accessory winning switch 25a (S30).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (the special symbol display control process). S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process is terminated. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S311). Then, one of S300 to S310 is processed according to the internal state.

In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 13. A first hold storage buffer to be stored, and a second hold storage buffer for storing hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as a random number for jackpot determination obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14. Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of stored storages (4 for the first reserved storage data and 4 for the second reserved storage data) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is conditioned on the condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first hold storage number counter for counting is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for variation pattern determination) are generated from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage number counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed.

Regarding the following description of the hold storage, it may be indicated that the information regarding the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer as "hold storage". Further, it is mentioned above that the numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer may be referred to as the first reserved storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as the second reserved storage information. That's right.

The processes of S300 to S307 are as follows.
The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a small hit, and a process for determining the small hit type when the display result is a small hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) is a process for determining the variation pattern and controlling the start of timing of the variation time timer.

The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the variation on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer. It is a process to stop and derive and display the stopped symbol.

The big winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a process for controlling the opening of the big winning opening in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 when the big hit gaming state is reached. The large winning opening opening process (S306) performs control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening, and the like. It is a process. If the conditions for closing the big prize opening are satisfied and there are no remaining rounds, the process shifts to the big hit end process. The jackpot end process (S307) is a process of performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a processing for controlling the opening of the operating port in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit gaming state is reached. The small hit opening process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not the game ball has V-winned in the V-winning area 870 in the V-judgment winning device 87, and transmitting a V-winning designation command when the V-winning is won. , It is a process of performing a process such as a process of transmitting a small hit end specification command when the end timing of the small hit is reached.

The small hit end process (S310) is a process for shifting to the big hit game state when the game ball wins a V in the V winning area 870 in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (transmission of a big hit start designation command, big hit display). Set the time, set the jackpot opening mode, set the process flag transition for the jackpot opening pre-processing, etc.), while specially without shifting to the jackpot gaming state when the V prize is not awarded. This is a process for executing a process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1221. When the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage number for counting the first reserved storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process in which the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected start winning of the first special symbol is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the time of starting winning (S1215).

In this embodiment, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, various data obtained at the time of the starting winning are stored as reserved storage information, and then the variable display is started. When the condition is satisfied, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is started is changed based on the reserved storage information in the special symbol normal processing (S300) at the timing when the variable display is started. The determination of whether or not the display result is the jackpot display result and the determination of the jackpot type are performed based on the jackpot determination value set corresponding to the above-mentioned various random number values and the jackpot type determination value. Then, in the variation pattern setting process (S301), the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) is changed to the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random values described above. Do it based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a decision, the timing before the variable display based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is the first start. At the timing when the start winning is won in the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (the timing when the holding storage information is stored), the holding storage information storing various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is pre-read, and the pre-read hold is performed. Based on the stored information, the determination of whether or not it will be a big hit, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the determination of the type of big hit, and the determination of the fluctuation pattern type are performed in accordance with the various random values described above. The prize-winning effect processing for pre-reading determination is executed based on the set jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 100 predicts the variation display result in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on various determination results at the time of starting winning, the effect symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big hit (possibility of a big hit) during the variable display.

Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize-winning effect process (S1216), and also transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and sets the value of the first reserved storage number counter in the EXT data to specify the first reserved storage number. Control is performed to send a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first is regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.). Every time the start winning opening 13 is started, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S1216 to S1219 is executed and a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening 13, a symbol designation command, a variable type command, and a first start prize designation command are generated. And a set of four commands of the first hold storage number specification command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state (S1221). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage number for counting the second reserved storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 3), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 4) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing as described in S1215 for the detected start winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize-winning effect process (S1226), and also controls to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S1227). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and sets the value of the second reserved storage number counter in the EXT data to specify the second reserved storage number. Control is performed to send a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.), the second Every time a start winning is given to the starting winning opening 14, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S1226 to S1229 is executed and the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, and the second start winning winning designation command are executed. And a set of four commands of the second hold storage number specification command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (S51). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no hold storage data in the hold storage buffer in S51, the process for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command (S80) is performed, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer (S52). If there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) The data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is set according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed by using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Is done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer. Is done.

Under the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second hold storage exists in the second hold storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second hold storage can be displayed. It is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first hold storage.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. Further, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (S59). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads random number 1 (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passage process or S1224 of the start port switch pass process and stored in the hold storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value (see FIG. 5) and a small hit judgment value (see FIG. 5) with a random number for big hit judgment, and if they match, it is decided to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes the process of determining. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5 (A), the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B). Then, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y of S60), it shifts to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also determines whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. ..

If it is decided to make a big hit in S61 (Y in S61), a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (when "second" is indicated), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (D) is selected (S74), S75. Proceed to.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. Determined (S75) and proceed to S81.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating "second" (variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is the data indicating "second" (variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 5 (B). Is used to determine which small hit determination value the value of the large hit determination random number (random 1) matches, thereby performing the small hit determination process (S76). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B) (Y in S76), it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the large hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 5 (E) (S79), and match the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the large hit type stored in the random number buffer area. The type of big hit corresponding to the value to be used is determined as the type of big hit via small hit (S80). Then, it shifts to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, the data indicating the jackpot type determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time saving jackpot", the data indicating the jackpot type is set. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit", "03" is set in the provisional big hit type buffer different from the big hit type buffer as the data indicating the big hit type. When the jackpot type is via small hit 9 (8) R time saving jackpot, "04" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is via small hit 5 (4) R time reduction jackpot, "05" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit are V prizes in the small hit gaming state. If there is no big hit, there is data that becomes invalid and is temporarily set.

In S82, a stop symbol of a special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5", and "9", which is the small hit symbol selected and determined in S80 according to the small hit type, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is the jackpot symbol according to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) (S79).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process.

In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and ends the variable display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and the data indicating "second" is stored in the special symbol pointer. If it is set, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, if the jackpot flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

When the jackpot flag is set, such as when it is determined that the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot or the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is set, the CPU 56 sets the time-saving flag, which is a flag set when the time-saving state is controlled. When it is set, the time reduction flag is reset (S134), and either the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 2 designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the determined jackpot type. Process for sending the command (big hit start designation command) (S135).

As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, the jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S136). After that, in the large winning opening pre-opening process, the large winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening is opened and the round is started.

Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times) is referred to with reference to the opening pattern data for each type of jackpot stored in the ROM 54 described above according to the type of jackpot specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55. , Or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and other data indicating the opening mode are set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S138), and the process is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the pre-opening process for the large winning opening.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133 described above, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit opening control timer used for the small hit opening control by referring to the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 (for example,). (10 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 second), and data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time between openings are set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is due to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state is set (S142). When the time saving flag is not set in S142, the time saving state is not set, and the process proceeds to S152 described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, it is in the time saving state, so that the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state is counted. The total time reduction counter as a counting means is updated by -1 subtraction (S143).

The total time reduction counter that is subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the 4R symbol time reduction jackpot in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, and is of a type other than the 4R symbol time reduction jackpot. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big hit, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, it is subtracted and updated every time the variation display which is the off display result is executed once. The total time reduction counter is used to determine both whether or not the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied and whether or not the end condition of the second time reduction state is satisfied.

Next, based on confirming whether or not the special symbol pointer is the data indicating the "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end of the variation display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end of the variation display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 time reduction counter, which is subtracted and updated in S146, is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state after the end of the big hit game. In the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time reduction state, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time reduction state. Will be done. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 every time the variation display which is the result of the second special symbol being removed is executed once.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter becomes "0", one of the end conditions of the first time reduction state is satisfied, or one of the end conditions of the second time reduction state is satisfied. Since it is a time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state that is being executed. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "0", it is for confirming whether or not the other end condition of the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied. Then proceed to S148.

In S148, in order to confirm whether or not the end condition of the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state being executed is satisfied based on the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time-saving state. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter that has been subtracted and updated in S143 has become "0" (S148). If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S152, which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time reduction counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

In S149 and S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol has become the number of times of the end condition, and by S148, the first special symbol and the first special symbol and It is executed to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed when it is determined that the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has reached the number of times of the end condition. ..

In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set time reduction counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the end of the time saving condition based on the number of times of variation display in the time saving state, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151), and the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S152), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

In such a special symbol stop process, according to S142 to S151, in the first time saving state, the execution of one deviation variation display of the second special symbol and the total of 5 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When any of the execution of the out-of-times variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, according to S142 to S151, when the second time is shortened, the second special symbol is executed 7 times and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed 11 times in total. When any of the above is satisfied, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer set before the jackpot end process is executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (S162). If it has not passed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the jackpot to be terminated is the 8R time-saving jackpot based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 in the current jackpot game state ( S163).

When the type of jackpot that ends in S163 is the symbol 4R time reduction jackpot, in order to control to the first time reduction state, as the end condition of the first time reduction state, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to "1" (second special). Set the data of the symbol variation display once (S164), and set the data of "5" (corresponding to the total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 times) in the total time reduction counter (S165). ). Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

When the type of the jackpot ending by S163 is not the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, it means that the type of the jackpot ending is a jackpot type other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, and the second time-saving state is to be controlled in order to control the second time-saving state. As the end condition of, the data of "7" (corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol once) is set in the special figure 2 time reduction counter (S167), and "11" (the first special symbol and the first special symbol and) are set in the total time reduction counter. Set the data (corresponding to the total fluctuation display of the second special symbol 11 times) (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

In S170, a time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, according to the end of the big hit game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S171), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

As a result, it is controlled to the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit, and is controlled to the second time saving state after the end of the big hit type big hit gaming state other than the symbol 4R time saving big hit. The end conditions for each of the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are individually defined by the number of variable display of only the second special symbol and the total number of variable display opening of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. To.

In such a jackpot end process, by S164 and S165, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the second special symbol is executed once and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The setting is made to control to the first time saving state until any one of the execution of the deviation variation display of 5 times in total is satisfied. In addition, according to S167 and S168, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the second special symbol is executed 7 times and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are totaled 11 It is set to control to the second time saving state until one of the execution of the out-of-times variation display is satisfied.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S308). In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 in the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode set in S140 of FIG. 13, and operates the V determination winning device 87. The mouth opening operation is started (S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Next, the CPU 56 sets a V-determined winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small hit as the end condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is set. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S309) (S413).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening processing, the CPU 56 updates the small hit opening control timer by -1 subtraction (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V determination winning number counter for counting the number of V winnings in S435, which will be described later, is "0" (S431). The V determination winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in FIG. 15, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counting value becomes "0". When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit release control timer set in S140 of FIG. 13 has timed out (timer value = 0). (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled according to the clock value of the small hit release control timer based on the small hit opening mode set in S140 of FIG. The movable portion 872 is operated in the open state, and a process for opening and closing the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is open inside the V judgment prize device 87 is detected, the V prize is won. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is in the ON state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it is when the V winning is detected, and the V winning flag set when the V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting the V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball has been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening / closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning region 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V, the V-winning opening of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and then the game that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87. All the balls are guided to the winning ball region and detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

On the other hand, when it is not in the ON state in S434, it means that the V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15b is in the ON state (S438). If it is in the ON state in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if it is not in the ON state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, a process for down-counting the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter set to "10" by S413 in FIG. 15 to "-1" (S439) and transmitting a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is performed. (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 is detected after the V winning ball is detected, and enters the determination winning device 87. It becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls played.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small hit is satisfied because the V winning number of the small hit reaches the upper limit value. When the small hit release control timer times out in S432, it means that the small hit release end condition is satisfied because the small hit release control is completed. At these times, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the closed state, and closes the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", the counting value of the V-judgment winning number counter corresponds to the counting value of the V-judgment winning number counter 87 even while the V-judgment winning device 87 according to the opening mode of the small hit is being opened. The V determination winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit opening control timer times out, the V determination winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit opening control in the small hit opening mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period, which is the V-winning valid period after the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed, is set in the V-winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (small hit end processing). It is updated to the value corresponding to S310) (S443), and the process is terminated. As a result, the timekeeping for a specific period, which is the valid period for the V prize after the V determination prize device 87 is closed, is started. Since the specific period, which is the V-winning validity period, is set in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V-winning area later than the time when the game ball normally passes in some time signature, the game ball Can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally tries to win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit end post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning validity period timer by -1 subtraction (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is used to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. Determines whether or not is in the ON state (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that the V prize is detected during the V prize valid period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting the V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V prize has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has been completed. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, the opening / closing member is opened to control the V winning region 870 (V winning opening) to return to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hit game state, if a right-handed hit is made according to the right-handed promotion notification described later, the game ball is allowed to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. The game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 always wins the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the jackpot flag is set in S449, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Next, the CPU 56 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer according to the fact that it is determined that the data will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. Formally memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time (the first time saving flag and the second time saving flag set in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14) is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Further, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the opening count (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval are determined according to the jackpot type. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as time (large winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S455), and the process is terminated. As a result, when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big hit game state does not occur. Therefore, in S81, the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer is deleted (S456), and the special symbol process flag is used. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S457), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). For example, in the command analysis process, when a variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, in the command analysis process, when the display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various effect control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set. Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process process (S705). In the effect control process process, among the processes according to the control state, in order to perform various effects such as the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704. Select the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers such as random numbers for selection determination of various effect contents is executed (S706). After that, it shifts to S702.

When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the variation display time specified by the variation pattern command elapses, or the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When this is done, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. By executing such an effect control main process, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect display device 9 and various lamps are transmitted according to the effect control command transmitted and received from the game control microcomputer 560. By controlling the effect device such as the speaker 27, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

In the effect control microcomputer 100, when a variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when a symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped. May be good. The variation pattern command is a command consisting of data that can specify the length of the variation time and the information necessary for specifying the variation display mode such as the variation display result. The variation display is controlled to be executed at the variation time corresponding to each variation pattern command. Further, the stop symbol when executing the effect control for variablely displaying the effect symbol is determined based on the display result designation command and the determination of whether the effect symbol is out of order or a big hit.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the processes of S500 and S501, and then performs any process of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed, but is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol. Both the control related to the effect and the control related to the effect synchronized with the change of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process process. Further, in the effect control process process, an effect corresponding to (synchronized) the variation display of the normal symbol is also executed in a manner that can be displayed in parallel with the variation display of the special symbol.

Hitting promotion effect processing (S500): Based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game state is confirmed, and the hit ball promotion effect according to the game state is executed. The hitting ball promotion effect is an effect of promoting the driving of the game ball into at least one of the first path (left-handed path) and the second path (right-handed path) in the game area 7. Specifically, the hitting promotion effect includes a right-handed promotion notification effect for notifying the promotion of the game ball to be driven into the second path (right-handed path), and the hitting promotion effect includes the right-handed promotion. The notification effect and the effect of the left-handed promotion notification for promoting the driving of the game ball into the first path (left-handed path) may be included.

The effect of the right-handed promotion notification is, for example, in a specific display area of the effect display device, a character image such as "right-handed" that suggests and promotes right-handedness is continuously displayed together with a right-pointing arrow image. It is done by doing.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the basis for hitting a game ball, and as a hitting promotion effect, a second path (right) is based on a state in which left-handed hitting promotion notification is not executed and right-handed hitting promotion notification is executed. The driving of the game ball into the first route (left-handed route) is promoted (right-handed), and conversely, based on the state in which the right-handed promotion notification is not executed, the game ball is driven into the first route (left-handed route) (left). An example of effect control that promotes hitting) will be described.

As the hitting promotion effect, the effect control may be performed in which both the left-handed promotion notification and the right-handed promotion notification are used properly according to the game state. Further, as the hitting promotion effect, the effect control may be performed in which both the left-handed promotion notification and the right-handed promotion notification are used properly according to the game state.

Look-ahead processing (S501): This is a process of storing the hold storage information (hold information) corresponding to the hold storage information possessed by the game control microcomputer 560, and making the hold storage information usable for the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is the content of the change display of the special symbol based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold storage information before the turn of the change display (design change) of the special symbol based on the hold storage information arrives. It is a production technique that gives a notice at a stage before that, such as determining what will happen to the variable display of the special symbol in the future. For example, when it is shown that the hold storage information is a small hit or a symbol big hit, a notice effect (see FIG. 21) called a hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the reserved storage information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as “target reserved storage information”. Further, the hold display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as "target hold display".

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect start processing (S801) at the time of variation.

Effect symbol change start process (S801): Control is performed so that the change effect, which is an effect corresponding to the change display of the special symbol, is started. Corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command, the effect pattern of the effect during fluctuation is selected, and the time of the effect time timer for measuring the effect time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect during fluctuation (S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (S802): Controls the switching timing and the like of each state constituting the effect pattern, and monitors whether or not the effect time timed by the effect time timer has expired. Then, in order to end the effect time effect based on the end of the effect time or the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect stop process (S803) at the time of change. Update to value.

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S803): Controls to stop the effect during fluctuation and display the effect result corresponding to the variation display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (S800).

Big hit display processing (S804): When a big hit (first big hit or second big hit) occurs, control or the like to perform a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Display control is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (S805).

Round processing (S805): Display control during a big hit round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S807).

Round post-processing (S806): Display control between big hit rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (S805).

Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

Small hit display process (S808): When a small hit occurs, a fanfare effect as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a small hit is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Display control such as control is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S809).

Small hit opening process (S809): In the small hit, various effect controls are performed while the V determination winning device 87 is open. Then, when the V determination winning device 87 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S810).

Small hit end effect processing (S810): In the effect display device 9, the effect control is performed to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Further, in the small hit game state, when the V prize of the game ball is detected by the V prize switch 87a and it is determined that the V prize has occurred, the V prize effect effect control for notifying that the V prize has occurred is performed. When a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) in order to shift to the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) because the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled by each of the above processes, the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 101 recognizes the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variation display executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result specification command, and produces the effect at the time of variation. Determine the result. Further, in the effect control process process, the S500 confirms the execution status of the effect control process, and the hit ball promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of hitting promotion effects including a high base state right-handed promotion notification, a small hit right-handed promotion notification, and a large hit right-handing promotion notification as the hitting promotion effect. The high-base state right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14) by hitting right in the high-base state. be. The small hit right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for making a right-handed hit and aiming for the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87 (V-winning area) in the small-hit game state. The jackpot right-handed promotion notification is a ball hitting promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 (big winning opening) by hitting right in the jackpot gaming state.

High-base state right-handed promotion notification, small hit right-handed promotion notification, and big hit right-handed promotion notification, along with a character image that suggests and promotes right-handedness such as "right-handed", along with an arrow image pointing to the right. It may be executed using the same image that is continuously displayed. In other words, even if the right-handed promotion notification is displayed in a state in which it is not possible to specify whether it corresponds to the promotion notification in the high base state, the promotion notification in the small hit, or the promotion notification in the big hit. good. The right-handed promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image that suggests and promotes right-handedness, such as "right-handed", together with a right-pointing arrow image. The small hit right-handed promotion notification may be displayed as a yellow image, the large hit right-handed promotion notification may be displayed as a red image, and the like may be executed using different images. In this embodiment, the high-base state right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a blue image, the small hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a yellow image, and the big hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a red image. To explain. Further, the size of the image used for the effect may be different depending on the type of the ball striking promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the production may be different depending on the advantage for the player. As an example, the small hit right-handed promotion notification is promoted using a small image, the high-base state right-handed promotion notification is promoted using a medium-sized image, and the large hit right-handed promotion notification is large. The promotion notification may be performed using the image of. As for the high-base state right-handed promotion notification, the promotion notification may be performed using a large image in the same manner as the big hit right-handed promotion notification.

Next, as an example of the effect during the big hit game state displayed on the effect display device 9 when the "design big hit" or the "big hit via the small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14. The V combo production (VCOMBO production) will be described. The V-combo effect is performed during a predetermined period during a predetermined round during the big hit game state when the "design big hit" or "big hit via small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. , It is an effect of notifying the number of payouts (outgoing balls) of prize balls in a big hit game state at a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect of notifying the number of payouts of prize balls in a plurality of times in stages.

FIG. 20 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the round suggestion effect. In FIG. 20, an example of the round suggestion effect is shown with the passage of time, and an image having little relation to the round suggestion effect is omitted. The round suggestion effect is a round in the big hit game state executed via the end of the small hit by the display image of the effect display device 9 when it is determined that the big hit is caused by the occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game state. It is a production that suggests a number.

20 (A) to 20 (E) show an example of a round suggestion effect. In the small hit game state, the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V determination winning device 87. When a V-winning occurs in such a state, the V-shaped V-winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 20 (A). As a result, the V winning notification indicating that the winning has occurred is given. The display of the V winning image 94 is continued until the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to the closed state.

As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, when the V winning image 94 is displayed in response to the occurrence of the V winning, the aura image 95 (95A to 95E) imitating the aura is V winning. It is displayed in an effect image-like display mode that clings to the periphery of the image 94. As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the aura image is composed of a plurality of colors such as aura image white 95A, aura image blue 95B, aura image green 95C, aura image red 95D, or aura image rainbow 95E. Displayed in the selected color. In the figure, the color of the aura image 95 is shown by the color characters in parentheses (the color characters are not actually displayed, but may be displayed). As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the color of the aura image 95 can be changed and displayed in a predetermined plurality of stages such as white → blue → green → red → rainbow during the small hit game. The color of such an aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of winnings in the V determination winning device 87.

The color of the aura image 95 may not change or may change during the small hit game. The aura image 95 can suggest the expected degree of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state to the color. As for the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, the correspondence relationship of "white <blue <green <red <rainbow" is predetermined. As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation of a large number of rounds in the big hit game state by the color of the aura image 95. For example, the player can recognize that the number of rounds is more likely to be larger when the aura image red 95D is displayed than when the aura image blue 95B is displayed.

By executing the round number suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V winning aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of gaming balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 after the game medium has entered the specific area. Since the production mode of the predetermined production such as the production can be changed, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production without delaying the progress of the game.

Further, since the round number suggestion effect by the V-winning aura image 95 is executed in connection with the effect of notifying the V-winning by displaying the V-winning image 94, the effect further improves the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, since the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination prize device 87, the round number suggestion effect and the V The player can be focused on the number of game balls that have entered the determination winning device 87.

Further, the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 corresponds to the number of rounds (advantage of the number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state controlled based on the V winning in the small hit gaming state. Since the number of rounds of the jackpot can be changed step by step, the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

FIG. 21 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the hold continuous notification effect. FIG. 22 is a timing chart of the hold continuous notification effect. With reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a hold continuous notification effect as a special effect will be described. In FIG. 21, an example of the hold continuous notification effect is shown in (A) to (D) according to the passage of time. FIG. 22 shows the effect control timing of the period from the start of the small hit game state to the start of the big hit game state based on the V prize.

The hold ream is the hold storage information that exists when the big hit occurs, and there is the hold storage information that will be the big hit in the future, and it existed after the end of the big hit gaming state and before the big hit occurred. The next big hit occurs continuously within the range of the reserved storage information that existed at the time of the big hit, such that the next big hit occurs within the range of the reserved storage information. A big hit (reserved inner villa). Since the small hit is a big hit via the small hit based on the occurrence of the V prize, the reserved storage information of the small hit is the reserved storage information that will be the big hit in the future.

The hold ream in this embodiment is determined by targeting the inside of the hold storage information of the second hold storage information when a big hit occurs in the time saving state (high base state). When the second reserved storage information exists, the second reserved storage information has priority over the first reserved storage information and is used for variable display. Therefore, in the time saving state (high base state), the reserved storage information of the second reserved storage information is used. If there is hold storage information of a small hit or a symbol big hit, continuous big hits may occur, so that these hold storage information is determined to be the storage information of the hold sequence.

As shown in FIGS. 21A and 22; The V-shaped V-winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9 over a relatively short predetermined period. As a result, the V prize notification indicating that the V prize has occurred is given. When the hold continuous effect is executed, the following effects are executed over the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

In the small hit game state, when a predetermined time elapses after the V prize is generated, as shown in FIGS. 21B and 22, the entire screen of the effect display device 9 turns black (darkens) and nothing is displayed. The blackout display that appears not to be displayed is executed as a basic effect by the opening process (S809) and the small hit end process (S810) in FIG. Instead of the effect, it is continuously executed until the end of the small hit game state (the first process of the hold continuous notification effect). The blackout display may be a difficult-to-see effect that changes the visibility of a predetermined image to a difficult-to-see state lower than the reference state, or an effect that surprises the player. For example, the entire display screen is black. Instead of darkening to a one-color image, an image of a predetermined color such as translucent black is superimposed on the front side of the normally displayed production image (effect image such as a production pattern, a character, and a background image). By doing so, an effect of reducing the brightness of the image of the entire display screen to darken the image as a whole or an effect of giving a special feeling to the player may be performed.

Then, after the end of the small hit game state, the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit (the effect of notifying the start of the big hit, which is an effect of notifying the start of the big hit, which is executed as a basic effect by the big hit display process (S804) in FIG. Instead of (shown by), the hold continuous notification as shown in FIGS. 21 (C) or 21 (D) and FIG. 22 is executed (second process of the hold continuous notification effect). Specifically, when there are three totals of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, "+3BONUS" as shown in FIG. 21 (C). Is displayed, and the hold continuous notification is performed. If there are four totals of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, the characters "+4 BONUS" are displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (D). By doing so, the hold continuous notification is performed. Further, although not shown, if there are two totals of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, the characters "+2 BONUS" are displayed. By doing so, the hold continuous notification is performed. As described above, in the hold continuous notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information after the end of the big hit game state, and the number is notified.

In this way, the number of the reserved storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the number of the reserved storage information determined to be the small hit are identifiable in the reserved continuous notification effect, so that the reserved storage is advantageous for the player. By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of information, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

As shown in FIG. 22, such a hold continuous notification is executed until the elapse of a specific period at the beginning of the production of the jackpot game state, such as before the start of the first round of the jackpot game. After the hold continuous notification is executed, the process during the round (S805) of FIG. 19 starts the production of the first round of the jackpot gaming state, for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 22. In this way, the hold continuous notification effect is executed across the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

The reason why the blackout display is executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed is as follows. When the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the round number suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20 is not executed. When the V-judgment winning device 87 having the deceleration structure described above is used, the game ball slowly flows down the passage on the V-judgment winning device 87. Of the open times, at what point the V prize will occur, and at what point the upper limit number of 10th game balls, which is the end condition of the open state, will enter the V judgment winning device 87. Variations occur with each small hit. As a result, the timing at which the small hit game state ends varies depending on the occurrence of the small hit. When performing an effect in which the effect changes irregularly according to the number of game balls entering the V-judgment winning device 87, as in the round number suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20, the player feels uncomfortable. It will not be a directing. However, as an effect display during the period from the start of the small hit game state to the end of the small hit game state, for example, the ending is reached after a certain period of time, and the content of the effect changes according to the passage of time. If it is assumed that a certain effect is executed, the effect state at the end of the small hit will be different for each small hit, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. It becomes difficult to make adjustments to make the effect state at the end of the small hit uniform for each occurrence. Therefore, in order to execute the production of the small hit game so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort, the production by the blackout display in which the production content does not change is executed. That is, the blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hit game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to suitably execute the hold continuous notification effect for the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

Based on the fact that at least one of the reserved storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot or the reserved storage information determined to be a small hit is included when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state. Since the hold continuous notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

Further, when the V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the V prize notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed. Therefore, the V prize is executed in the small hit game state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production when the occurrence occurs.

In addition, at least one of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol big hit or the hold storage information determined to be a small hit when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state is included. Since the hold continuous notification effect can be executed based on the above, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information after the end of the big hit game state, and the number is notified. As a result, the player can specifically recognize the number of reserved storage information that is advantageous for the player, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect, for example, "+3 BONUS" in FIG. 21 (C) and "+ 4 BONUS" in FIG. 21 (D), the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information is Which effect mode is used to execute the hold continuous notification effect because the effect mode of the special effect to be executed differs between when the number is less than the predetermined number (3 pieces, etc.) and when the number is more than the predetermined number (4 pieces, etc.). Can draw the attention of the player.

In addition, in the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 21, an example of executing the blackout display after executing the V winning notification for a short time is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout display may be executed without notifying the V prize. Further, in the case of executing the hold continuous notification effect, other images such as a predetermined still image or a moving image that executes a repetitive operation for a short period of time may be displayed without executing the blackout display. Further, the blackout display period may be a fixed period. The hold continuous notification effect may be executed until the round effect of the big hit after the end of the small hit game state. When the blackout display period is set to a fixed time when the hold continuous notification effect is executed until the big hit round effect, the blackout display of the fixed period is executed from the time of V winning, so the period is black. The out display period may be a fixed period, and the end time of the blackout display may be indefinite until during the round production of the big hit. Further, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed at the time of V winning, or may be executed during the opening period of the V determination winning device 87 after V winning.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a data table used when selecting an effect mode of the round number suggestion effect. FIG. 23A shows a V-aura color change effect pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect patterns that change the color of the V-winning aura image 95 in the round number suggestion effect. FIG. 23B shows a V-aura color change effect pattern selection table used for selecting an effect pattern for changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 in the round number suggestion effect.

In FIG. 23A, each effect pattern in which the effect patterns of the first pattern to the eighth pattern are shown has the number of prizes (1 to 10 pieces, etc.) to the V determination winning device 87 during the small hit game state. ), The color of the V winning aura image 95 is set. For example, in the 6th pattern, the 1st and 2nd patterns are white, the 3rd to 6th patterns are blue, the 7th to 8th patterns are green, and the 9th to 10th patterns are red. The data is set. The number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87 is the total value of the game balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a. As the number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87, the value of the game ball detected by the V determination discharging switch 15b may be used.

As for the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, the correspondence relationship of "white <blue <green <red <rainbow" is predetermined, so in each production pattern, white → blue → as the number of winnings increases. A color change pattern is set so that the color can change according to the order of green → red. Iridescent is a color that includes other colors such as blue, green, and red. In this way, the effect pattern in which the expectation of the number of rounds changes to a color as the number of winnings increases increases the expectation of the player while the V-judgment winning device 87 is open in the small hit game state. It can be increased, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel when the opening control is extended.

Unlike the other effect patterns, the eighth pattern is an effect pattern in which the rainbow colors are set for all of the 1st to 10th items, and the colors do not change and are fixed to the rainbow colors. This is because the rainbow color is used as a special color suggesting that the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit has been confirmed. As an effect pattern suggesting that the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit is confirmed, for example, an effect pattern in which the color can change in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow may be used. good.

FIG. 23 (B) shows the correspondence between the type of the big hit via the small hit and the first pattern to the eighth pattern of FIG. 23 (A). In FIG. 23 (B), the effect control is performed for each of 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit. As one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, a total of 100 numerical values of the random number SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for selecting the V combo effect pattern are allocated to each of the corresponding first pattern to eighth pattern. Has been done.

In FIG. 23 (B), “via small hit 5 (4) R time saving big hit <small hit” corresponds to the magnitude relation of the expectation degree of the large number of rounds such as “white <blue <green <red <rainbow”. Via 9 (8) R time saving big hit <Small hit Via 16 (15) R time saving big hit ", so that the selection rate of the production pattern with high expectation of the number of rounds for the final 10th color will be high. The data is set in. In FIG. 23 (B), the eighth pattern is set to be selectable only in the case of 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit. As a result, when the round number suggestion effect is executed in the 8th pattern (all the 1st to 10th pieces are rainbow colors), it is confirmed that the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit is confirmed. It is possible to suggest to. The eighth pattern may be selectable for a big hit other than the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the presence / absence of a hold continuous notification effect. The hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

In the hold ream notification effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 24, for effect control when the total number of hold reams for the symbol 15R time-saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time-saving big hit via the small hit is 0 to 4, respectively. A total of 150 random numbers SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 149) for determining the presence / absence of pending continuous notification as one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100 are "executed (executed)" and "executed non-executed". (Do not execute) ”.

In this way, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a hold storage information and a target that can be a big hit in which the big prize opening opens 15 times. In addition, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed for the hold storage information that can be a big hit of other types. In the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, when the target hold storage information is 0 or 1, "execution present" is not determined, and only "no execution" is determined. Has been done.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set so that "execution available" can be determined when the total number of hold storage information to be the target is two or more, and the data is the target. The data is set so that the ratio of "execution available" is determined as the number of reserved storage information increases. As a result, the hold continuous notification effect is executed according to the number of hold storage information that can be a big hit, which is an advantageous number of rounds for the player, such as the symbol 15R time saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time saving big hit. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to how many times the jackpot, which is an advantageous number of rounds, is executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

Further, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of hold memory information that can be a big hit, so that the effect can further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect determination table, when the total number of hold stations for the symbol 15R time saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit is 2 or more among the big hit types, the hold continuous notification effect is performed. The data is set to run. As a result, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can store a plurality of hold storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous for the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types. By making it recognizable, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

Further, as the execution target of the hold continuous notification effect, the hold storage information that can be a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds such as the symbol 15R time reduction big hit and the 16 (15) R time reduction big hit is used, so that the hold continuous notification effect can be performed. When executed, the player naturally has a high expectation that the big winning opening will be opened 15 times, which is the most advantageous big hit game state for the player, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production.

Next, the hold consecutive / round number suggestion effect selection process for determining whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification effect and the round number suggestion effect and selecting the effect type will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a hold sequence / round number suggestion effect selection process.

The hold ream / round number suggestion effect selection process of FIG. 25 is included in the process of setting various effects in the effect symbol variation start process (S801 of FIG. 19). In the hold consecutive / round number suggestion effect selection process, first, whether or not the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is a small hit display result is determined (displayed) based on the display result specification command received at the time of this variation. The result may be determined based on a identifiable variation pattern command) (S851). The received display result designation command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103, and determines whether or not the small hit display result is obtained depending on whether or not a command for specifying the small hit display result is stored in the area indicating the variation display executed this time. To judge.

If the result is not a small hit display result according to S851, the process ends. On the other hand, when the small hit display result is obtained by S851, the current second hold storage information stored in the look-ahead process (S501) of FIG. 19 (hold storage information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14). ) Is acquired (S852). Then, based on the acquired second hold storage information, it is confirmed whether or not there is hold storage information that is a symbol jackpot (symbol 15R time-saving jackpot) that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect (S853), and the target of the hold continuous notification effect. It is confirmed whether or not there is a reserved storage information (which can be a 16 (15) R time saving big hit via a small hit). Next, SR2 is extracted, and based on the confirmation information in S853 and S854, the hold continuous notification effect is executed based on the hold storage information in the current second hold storage information using the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. It is determined whether or not to do (whether or not to execute) (S855).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the player is controlled to the small hit game state, if the player hits the right according to the right-handed promotion notification, a V prize is generated with a probability of approximately 100% and the player is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, the hold storage information that becomes a small hit is also determined as the hold storage information that becomes a hold sequence together with the hold storage information that becomes a big hit.

When the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is made by S855, the hold continuous notification effect information (for example, the notification target hold) which is the data to be used when executing the hold continuous notification effect corresponding to the current variation display. The number of stations, whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed, etc.) are stored in a predetermined effect data storage area (S857), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is decided by S855 not to execute the hold continuous notification effect, it is decided to execute the round suggestion effect (color change effect of the aura image) (S858). Next, the type of the big hit via the small hit is confirmed based on the display result specification command confirmed in S851, SR3 is extracted, and the execution is performed using the V aura color change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 23 (B). The production pattern of the round suggestion effect is selected and determined (S859). Then, as data to be used when executing the round suggestion effect with the determined effect pattern, the number of rounds is suggested, such as storing the effect pattern data stored in the V aura color change effect pattern table in FIG. 23 (A). The effect information (for example, the round number suggestion effect pattern, the presence / absence of the round number suggestion effect, etc.) is stored in a specific effect data storage area (S860), and the process is terminated.

When it is decided to execute the hold continuous notification effect when the variation display becomes the small hit display result, the hold continuous notification effect is executed based on the data stored in S857. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the hold continuous notification effect when the variable display becomes the small hit display result, the round number suggestion effect is executed based on the data stored in S860. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a hold continuous notification effect, S858 may be executed after S855.

It should be noted that the round number suggestion effect may also be executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed. In addition, the round number suggestion effect is not always executed when the hold continuous notification effect is not executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the round number suggestion effect by a predetermined lottery when the hold continuous notification effect is not executed. You may. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the round number suggestion effect by a predetermined lottery, and when it is decided to execute the round number suggestion effect, the hold continuous notification effect may not be executed. In this way, the hold continuous notification effect and the round number suggestion effect may be executed with priority given to either one, or both may be executed without giving priority to either one.

Next, the round number suggestion effect processing for executing the above-mentioned round number suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the round number suggestion effect processing. The round number suggestion effect process of FIG. 26 is configured and executed as a part of the process during opening of the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

In the round number suggestion effect processing, first, the round number suggestion effect information (round number suggestion effect pattern, presence / absence of execution of the round number suggestion effect, etc.) stored in S860 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S840). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to execute the round number suggestion effect is made based on the information regarding whether or not the round number suggestion effect is executed obtained by S840 (S841). If the decision to execute the round number suggestion effect is not made in S841, the process ends. On the other hand, when the decision to execute the round number suggestion effect is made in S841, it is the time when the V specific winning ball detection designation command output when the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 is detected is received. Check whether or not (S842).

If the command is not received in S842, the process ends. On the other hand, when the command is received in S842, the winning number counter as a counting means for counting the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is updated by +1 addition (S843). Then, based on the effect pattern of the round number suggestion effect acquired in S840, the aura image 95 is displayed in the color corresponding to the number counted by the updated winning number counter (S843). By displaying the aura image 95 in the color corresponding to the number in S843, the round number suggestion effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is executed. It will be. The V winning image 94 starts to be displayed based on the reception of the V winning designation command in the opening process (S809) of the small hit effect. When the V winning occurs, the V specific winning ball is immediately generated. Since the detection designation command is received, the aura image 95 corresponding to the V winning image 94 is displayed by S843 in the color determined by S844 immediately after the V winning is generated. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the round number suggestion effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed is executed.

Next, the first process of the hold continuous notification effect for executing the above-mentioned hold continuous notification effect during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first process of the hold continuous notification effect. The first process of the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 27 is configured and executed as a part of the process of opening the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

In the first process of the hold continuous notification effect, first, the hold continuous notification effect information (the number of hold stations to be notified, whether or not the hold continuation notification effect is executed, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S861). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is made based on the information regarding whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed obtained by S861 (S862). If the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is not made in S862, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is decided in S862 to execute the hold continuous notification effect, the V winning ball transmitted when the V winning ball to the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a is transmitted. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the detection designation command (S863).

If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the reception of the V prize detection designation command in S863, the process ends. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the V prize detection designation command in S863, the processing during opening of the small hit effect (S809) and the small hit are based on the information regarding the number of reserved stations to be notified acquired by S863. The blackout display to be executed until the end process (S810) is completed is started (S864), and the process is terminated. As a result, the blackout display as shown in FIG. 21B is executed until the end of the small hit game.

Next, the second process of the hold continuous notification effect for executing the above-mentioned hold continuous notification effect during the jackpot display will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second process of the hold continuous notification effect. The second process of the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 28 is configured and executed as a part of the jackpot display process (S804 of FIG. 19) of the jackpot effect.

In the second process of the hold continuous notification effect, first, the hold continuous notification effect information (the number of hold stations to be notified, whether or not the hold continuation notification effect is executed, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S871). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is made based on the information regarding whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed obtained in S871 (S872). If the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is not made in S872, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is decided in S872 to execute the hold ream notification effect, the hold ream notification mode is +2 BONUS (in the case of two target hold reams) based on the information regarding the number of hold reams to be notified acquired by S871. ), + 3BONUS (when the number of target reserved stations is 3), and +4 BONUS (when the number of target reserved stations is 4) are selected (S873). Then, in the hold continuous notification mode selected in S873, the execution of the hold continuous notification to be executed over a predetermined period during the jackpot display effect period is started. As a result, for example, the hold continuous notification as shown in FIGS. 21 (C) and 21 (D) is executed.

[V-winning image A variant example of holding continuous notification effect by aura color]
Next, a modified example of performing the hold continuous notification effect by the V winning image aura color will be described. In FIG. 21, an example of executing a hold continuous notification effect by character information such as “+3 BONUS” is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the aura image 95 capable of changing the color as shown in FIG. 20 may be used to perform the hold continuous notification effect.

As a hold continuous notification effect using the aura image 95, the aura image 95 displayed accompanying the V winning image 94 is, for example, as the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 increases, FIG. 20 The color of the aura image 95 may be changed as described above, and the color of the aura image 95 may be changed to a specific color such as rainbow color as the pending continuous notification as described above. Such a hold continuous notification effect displays an aura image based on the fact that the hold storage information includes at least one of the hold storage information that is a symbol big hit and the hold storage information that is a small hit. By making it possible to change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed.

When such a hold continuous notification effect is executed, the hold storage information includes at least one of the hold storage information which is a symbol big hit and the hold storage information which is a small hit, and is based on the aura. Since the effect mode of the effect of displaying the image can be changed to a specific mode, the player can recognize that the hold storage information includes the hold storage information that is the big hit via the symbol big hit or the small hit. As a result, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

[Modification example of change in production mode of hold continuous notification effect]
Next, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, only the case where the total number of the hold storage information that becomes the symbol big hit and the hold storage information that becomes the small hit via big hit is multiple, and the hold storage information that becomes the small hit via big hit An example in which the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect differs depending on the case where there are a plurality of items will be described.

Regarding the second hold storage information when the big hit game state is reached, there are cases of the first hold storage type in which only the hold storage information that becomes the symbol big hit exists, and the hold storage information and the small hit (via the small hit) that become the symbol big hit. There may be a case of a second hold ream type in which both of the hold storage information that becomes a big hit) exist, and a case of a third hold ream type in which only a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) exists. All of these multiple types of hold reams are called hold reams, but when notifying that there is a hold ream as a hold ream notification effect, the hold ream notification is performed in a different production mode depending on the hold ream type. May be executed. For example, in the case of the first hold consecutive type, the hold continuous notification is given in katakana such as "+3 bonus", and in the case of the second hold consecutive type, the hold continuous notification is given in English characters such as "+3 BONUS". In the case of the third hold ream type, the hold ream notification may be performed with a hiragana such as "+3 bonus". In addition, when notifying that there is a hold ream, an image such as characters related to the hold ream may be displayed in different colors depending on the type of the hold ream. In addition, when notifying that there is a hold ream, different character images are displayed according to the hold ream type (the display may be associated with the number of hold reams, or the character image alone may be displayed). An image such as a character related to the character may be displayed. In addition, for each of the 1st hold ream type to the 3rd hold ream type, there are a plurality of production modes such as "+3 bonus", a production mode such as "+3BONUS", and a plurality of types such as "+3 Bonus". From the production modes, the production mode may be selected and determined by lottery. In that case, the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed may be different for each of the hold series types of the first hold series type to the third hold series type.

By executing such a hold continuous notification effect, it is possible to make the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect to be executed different depending on the type of the hold sequence. Therefore, the hold continuous notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes. It is possible to draw the attention of the player. Further, when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first hold sequence type to the third hold sequence type, the game determines which effect mode the hold sequence notification effect is executed. Can draw people's attention.

[Modification example of limiting control of hold continuous notification effect]
Next, after executing the hold ream notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold reams, the execution of the hold ream notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold ream notification effect is exhausted. ) Will be described.

When executing the hold continuous notification effect when there are a plurality of hold storage information that becomes a symbol big hit and hold storage information that becomes a small hit (big hit via a small hit) in the second hold storage information when the big hit game state is reached. When the big hit game state in which the hold continuous notification effect is executed ends, the big hit targeted for the hold continuous notification is executed, and the hold continuous notification effect is executed even in the big hit game state, the hold continuous notification effect is executed. Whether the notification effect is continuously executed for the hold storage information of the hold ream that was the notification target in the previous jackpot game state, or the hold storage information of the hold ream based on the newly generated hold storage information is targeted. It becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is newly executed as a result, and the production becomes unclear.

Therefore, after executing the hold ream notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold reams, the execution of the hold ream notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold ream notification effect is exhausted. The effect control to be performed may be executed. After the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the hold continuous limit flag is set and the hold storage information is newly confirmed until the variable display based on all the hold storage information targeted for the notification continuous notification is executed. The execution of the effect control process may be restricted so that the process for executing the hold continuous notification is not executed. By doing so, after executing the hold continuous notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold stations, the hold continuous notification effect is executed until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect is exhausted. By prohibiting it, it is restricted to newly execute the hold continuous notification effect, so it is possible to clarify which of the hold storage information is the notification target of the hold continuous notification effect.

After executing the hold ream notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold reams, the execution of the hold ream notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold ream notification effect is exhausted. As an example, the following effects may be executed.

For example, after executing the hold ream notification effect to notify that there are a plurality of hold reams, the number of the hold reams is displayed so as to be identifiable by the number of stock images such as icon images, and is the target of the hold ream notification effect. Each time the jackpot game state is digested, the icon image may be reduced. Further, when the hold continuous notification is performed based on the newly generated hold storage information, such an effect of increasing the number of icon images may be performed. By visualizing the number of pending consecutive notification targets so that the player can recognize them in this way, it is possible to execute the pending continuous notification effect that is easy for the player to understand. Further, if such an effect is executed, after simply executing the hold continuous notification effect, the execution of the hold continuous notification effect is restricted until all the hold storage information targeted for the hold continuous notification effect is exhausted. However, the frequency with which the player is aware of the hold continuous notification effect increases, and it is possible to perform an interesting effect.

[Example of modification of execution timing of hold continuous notification effect]
Next, an example of executing the above-mentioned hold continuous notification effect during the V combo effect (VCOMBO effect) will be described. The V-combo effect is performed during a predetermined period during a predetermined round during the big hit game state when the "design big hit" or "big hit via small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14. , It is an effect of notifying the number of prize balls to be paid out (added value) in a big hit game state at a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect of notifying the number of payouts of prize balls in a plurality of times in stages.

[Example of specific production when displaying fluctuations after a big hit]
Next, during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot generated by the variation display of the first special symbol, the number of reserved storage information and the look-ahead determination of the reserved storage information are determined. Based on the result, a specific effect of performing a jackpot look-ahead effect in the reserved memory information will be described.

FIG. 29 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the specific effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of the specific effect. The specific effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

In FIG. 29, an example of the specific effect is shown according to the passage of time, and an image having little relation to the specific effect is omitted. In FIG. 30, in order to show an effect that matches the effect content of the specific effect of FIG. 29 and to show the overall control image of the specific effect in an easy-to-understand manner, one variation display after the end of the 4R symbol time reduction jackpot is displayed. An example is shown which is executed by the variable display by the second special symbol. Further, in FIG. 30, four second reserved storage information are accumulated during the winning promotion effect, and the second reserved storage is a big hit via a symbol jackpot or a small hit in the second reserved storage information up to the third. Information was not included (for example, when the 4th second reserved storage information includes a jackpot via a symbol jackpot or a small hit, and when the 4th second reserved storage information contains a symbol jackpot. Or, if the big hit via the small hit is not included), an example is shown in which all four variable displays accumulated during the winning promotion effect are sequentially executed after the end of the variable display. There is.

29 (A) to (O) and FIGS. 30 show an example of a specific effect. After the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the variable winning ball device 15 is set to the high base state by executing the electric chew support control until the second special symbol is variablely displayed once. Winning a prize in (Denchu) will be facilitated. Therefore, the second reserved storage information is likely to be accumulated by winning the variable winning ball device 15. Further, regarding the second reserved storage information, since the winning probability of the small hit that can be a big hit via the small hit is as high as about 1/7, the small hit is included in the maximum of four second reserved storage information. Hold storage information that is a big hit via the route can be included relatively frequently.

As an effect corresponding to such a game control mechanism, a look-ahead effect using the second reserved storage information as a look-ahead target during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. The specific effect as is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), at the start of the specific effect, the effect display device 9 performs a specific effect start effect of displaying a specific effect start image 9A indicating the start of the specific effect such as “final determination start”. At the same time, the display of the determination effect moving image (not shown), which is a moving image such as a predetermined movie image, is started. The judgment production video is a movie video with a series of storylines, such as a battle production in which an ally (player's ally) character and an enemy character fight, and ends as a background moving image from the start of the specific production. It will be displayed continuously until time. The specific effect start effect is executed over a first predetermined period so that the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is executed.

The left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 are variablely displayed in a variable display mode of small symbols that are variablely displayed in a reduced mode in the upper right corner of the screen. The downward arrow in the figure indicates that the variable display is in progress.

When the determination start effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29B, the effect display device 9 promotes the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 such as "Save the hold!" The winning promotion effect of displaying the image 9B is executed. The winning promotion effect is also an effect of promoting the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15, and is also an effect of promoting the storage of the second reserved storage information. In this embodiment, a prize-winning promotion image such as "Save hold!" Is displayed in the sense of promoting the storage of the second hold storage information, but the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 is promoted. In that sense, a winning promotion effect that displays a winning promotion image that specifies a specific winning location, such as "Let the electric chew win a prize!", May be executed.

In the winning promotion effect, for example, a second predetermined period required from when the number of the second reserved storage information is "0" to the maximum of "4" is set as the longest period. Even during the second predetermined period, when the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the maximum "4", the game ends at that time in order to suppress the subsequent unnecessary launch of the game ball.

After the execution of the winning promotion effect is started, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect according to the number of the second reserved storage information. Specifically, when the number of the second reserved storage information is "0", as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the left, middle, and right effect symbols corresponding to the current variation display (the variation display) are 91, 92, 93. As the image of, the image of the effect symbol (hereinafter referred to as the reach symbol) in which the reach mode (7 ↓ 7) is formed by the symbol of “7” is displayed in the center of the screen. As shown in FIGS. 29 (C) to 29 (G), the winning promotion image 9B is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a reduced manner until the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4). To. The winning promotion image 9B is deleted immediately after the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4) as shown in FIG. 29 (G).

When the first second reserved storage information is generated in the state where the second reserved storage information is "0", the holding first changing effect for changing the effect mode is executed as shown in FIG. 29 (D). To. In the hold 1st change effect, one reach symbol is added in response to the increase in the second hold storage number, and two reach symbols are displayed in a reduced manner from the upper center of the screen to the bottom. The production image is changed to the production. In FIG. 29 (D), the top reach symbol shows the currently changing effect symbols 91, 92, 93, and the second reach symbol shows the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the first reserved item. .. The image of the effect pattern on which the reach pattern is formed is called the reach line. In this way, when the first second reserved storage information is generated, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the effect control for reducing the number of reach lines to two (2 lines) is executed. The effect of increasing and displaying the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of such reach symbols is called a reach line increase effect.

As shown in FIG. 29 (E), when the second reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is first. The second pending change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying it under the look-ahead effect symbol 94 displayed in the above and increasing the number of reach lines (3 lines in total). As shown in FIG. 29 (F), when the third reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is first. The third pending change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying it under the look-ahead effect symbol 94 displayed in (4 lines in total) and increasing the number of reach lines. As shown in FIG. 29 (G), when the fourth reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is first. The fourth pending change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying it under the look-ahead effect symbol 94 displayed in the above and increasing the number of reach lines (5 lines in total).

In this way, in the specific effect, in response to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information, the change effect of changing the effect mode to increase the number of reach lines by displaying the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the reach symbols in an increased manner is performed. It will be done. The purpose of increasing the number of reach lines of the look-ahead effect symbol 94 consisting of the reach symbol of "7" is to increase and display the image displayed in response to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information in the specific effect. There is.

First, in the variation display other than the variation display in which the specific effect is executed, the reach symbol when the effect symbol is set to the reach display mode by the effect control microcomputer 100 is, for example, "7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numbers". It is selected and decided so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different due to the relationship of "design". Therefore, the player's expectation for a big hit is highest when the reach symbol is "7" among the reach symbols selected from the plurality of types. Therefore, in the specific effect, each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display is a reach symbol of "7" from the viewpoint of high expectation that it will be a big hit depending on the type of reach symbol. Is displayed by. As a result, in the specific effect, each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display is displayed with the reach symbol of "7" that the player feels advantageous, so that the player can hit the jackpot. Expectations can be raised. Further, in the specific effect, the effect of increasing the number of reach lines by the reach symbol of "7" can further increase the player's expectation for a big hit.

As the reach symbol used for the effect of increasing the number of reach lines in the specific effect, a symbol other than "7" may be used. For example, a symbol showing the character "RUSH" (a character suggesting an advantageous state for the player such as a rush of a big hit, a rush of a small hit, and a rush of a time saving state (electric support state)) (in a normal variable display). A special effect-dedicated pattern that is not used) may be used.

Moreover, you may use the reach symbol of "3". The reason is as follows. In pachinko gaming machines, in general, the reach symbol of "7" has a high expectation of becoming a big hit, a high expectation of maximizing the number of rounds when a big hit occurs, and after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is used as a symbol that the player expects to have a high degree of expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state (time saving state, electric support state, probable change state in a gaming machine that is in a probable change state, etc.). For example, the reach symbol when the effect symbol is set to the reach display mode is, for example, "7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numerical symbols", and the expectation that it will be the maximum number of rounds when it becomes a big hit is expected. It may be set to be selected and decided differently. As a result, it is expected that a general player has a feeling of expectation that the number of rounds at the time of a big hit will be the maximum round of big hits when the reach symbol of "7" is displayed.

Depending on the distribution of the number of rounds when it becomes a big hit, the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the first special symbol and the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the second special symbol are the big hits of the maximum number of rounds. In some cases, the selection rate of the type is set lower than the selection rate of the jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds. In such a case, when the jackpot is based on the reach symbol of "7", which also has the meaning of suggesting the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds in the specific production, the jackpot type of the number of rounds other than the maximum number of rounds is selected. In some cases. When a jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds is selected even though the jackpot is based on the reach symbol of "7", the player feels that the jackpot based on the reach symbol of "7" is the maximum number of rounds. If you have, the player's sense may not be consistent with the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In order to prevent such inconsistency in feeling, the above-mentioned symbol of "3", which has a higher expectation of a big hit than "7" and has a higher expectation of a big hit than other numerical symbols, is specified. It may be used as a reach symbol forming a reach line in the above.

In addition, as the reach line increase effect by the reach symbol in the specific effect, the reach selected from the symbol of "7", the symbol of "3", and the other symbols in a predetermined ratio according to the expectation of a big hit. A reach line with a pattern may be formed. In that case, the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of expectation for the maximum number of rounds of the big hit as described above may be different depending on the type of the reach symbol displayed as the reach line. By doing so, the variation of the reach pattern of the reach line is enriched, and the player can recognize the expectation that each second reserved storage information or the like will be a big hit, so that the fun of the production is improved.

In addition, such a specific effect is the first special effect as the first variation display after the end of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot game state, other than the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot game state. It may be executed when the variable display of the symbol is executed. Further, such a specific effect may be executed in a variable display at a predetermined timing after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot.

When the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit or the second predetermined period elapses from the start of the winning promotion effect, the winning promotion effect ends and is shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J). A suggestion effect suggesting whether or not such a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit) is executed is executed. If the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit before the second predetermined period elapses during the execution period of the winning promotion effect, the time without proceeding with the effect until the execution start timing of the suggestion effect is reached. It becomes a waiting period to wait for the progress of. Since the start timing of the suggestion effect is set to a fixed timing in advance, such a waiting period is provided for the winning promotion effect. The waiting period is not a period for executing a dedicated effect or the like, but a period for waiting for the progress of the effect (note that during the waiting period, a predetermined effect such as an effect indicating that the second reserved storage information is full). You may display the production image of). In the suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J), the display results are derived and displayed in order from the top in the reach lines arranged in the vertical direction corresponding to the fluctuation display and the second reserved storage information. To go. Specifically, the reach is in the order of this change (referred to as the change) → the first hold storage information → the second hold storage information → the third hold storage information → the fourth hold storage information. The combination of stop symbols is shown for each line. Such a combination of stop symbols is also called a suggestion effect symbol.

When the fluctuation display and the stored second hold storage information do not become a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time-saving big hit), FIGS. 29 (H) and 29 (I) As shown in, the corresponding reach symbol is displayed as a suggestion effect symbol stopped at the combination of the missed symbols (the combination in which the “7” symbols are not aligned). FIG. 29 (J) shows a display example when the second second reserved storage information is a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit).

When each of the fluctuation display and the stored second reserved storage information becomes a small hit (a large hit via a small hit) or a large hit (a symbol 15R time-saving big hit), for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (J). , The corresponding reach symbol stops at the combination of jackpot symbols (combination with all the symbols of "7"), and is enlarged and emphasized. The symbol combination in which the three symbols are aligned is reminiscent of an advantageous state (big hit, etc.) for the player. As a result, during the variable display, the variable display and the stored second reserved storage information become a small hit (big hit via the small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit) that is advantageous to the player. Is suggested.

In this way, in the suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased by displaying the symbol combination image reminiscent of the advantageous state for the player before the realistic big hit. By displaying a symbol combination image that suggests a big hit from the timing before the variation display result of the variation display is derived and displayed, the player is relieved at an early timing and the player's interest is excited from the early timing. be able to. The suggestion effect period for performing such a suggestion effect is set to be executed in a common constant effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

In the suggestion effect, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (symbol 15R time-saving big hits) among the variable display and the stored second reserved storage information, the corresponding cases are dealt with. Each of the plurality of reach symbols stops at the combination of jackpot symbols (combination in which the symbols of "7" are aligned), and is enlarged and highlighted.

If there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (design 15R time-saving big hits) among the fluctuation display and the stored second hold storage information, small hits (small hits). The information that the timing of the big hit (the big hit via) or the big hit (the symbol 15R time saving big hit) is earlier (for example, the second second reserved storage information and the third second reserved storage information are small hits or big hits). At one time, only the information corresponding to the second second reserved storage information) is targeted, and the corresponding reach symbol is stopped at the combination of jackpot symbols (combination with all the symbols of "7") and enlarged. It may be emphasized.

The symbol stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols having the symbols of "7" as shown in FIG. 29 (J) is the jackpot or the jackpot via the small hit (symbol) based on the corresponding variable display or the reserved storage information. It is an image that suggests that a 15R time saving jackpot will occur in advance, and then until the corresponding variation display (variation display based on the variation display or reserved storage information) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is continuously displayed as an image suggesting (notifying) that the player is in an advantageous state.

After the suggestion effect is executed, the following display is performed at the end of the variation display. In the suggestion effect, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the second reserved storage information includes a holding storage information that becomes a big hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) via a small hit. When it is included, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols is displayed as a suggestion effect symbol in the center of the screen, and the variation display is performed. The variation display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

Further, in the suggestion effect, the variable display becomes a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the variable display in the second hold storage information becomes a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit). When the stored information is not included, the variation display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 corresponding to the variation display stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols are displayed in the center of the screen.

Further, in the suggestion effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the second reserved storage information is a holding storage information that is a big hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) via a small hit. When included, the variation display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variation display stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols and the look-ahead effect symbol corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols. The fluctuation display result of 94 is displayed in the center of the screen.

In the variable display based on the second reserved storage information after the suggestion effect is completed, an effect of notifying (displaying) that the main symbol is a big hit and displaying (notifying) that it is out of the small symbol is executed. May be done.

In the suggestion effect, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the second reserved storage information includes a holding storage information that becomes a big hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) via a small hit. When it is not included, at the end of a series of suggestion effects, the combination of the out-of-reach symbols, which is the combination of the out-of-reach symbols, is displayed in the center of the screen.

When there are a plurality of suggested effect symbols 94 stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols in the suggestion effect, the plurality of look-ahead effect symbols 94 are displayed in the combination of the jackpot symbols at the end of the variation display. If there are a plurality of look-ahead effect symbols 94 stopped due to the combination of jackpot symbols in the suggestion effect, one look-ahead effect symbol 94 may be displayed as a representative image in a combination of jackpot symbols at the end of the variation display. ..

After the variable display results in an out-of-order display, the variable display is sequentially executed for the second reserved storage information that is the target of the specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to (O). FIG. 29 is an example in which it is suggested that the second second reserved storage information is a small hit (a large hit via a small hit) or a large hit (a symbol 15R time-saving big hit) in the suggestion effect. The pre-reading effect symbol 94 corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols shown in 29 (K) continues to be displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to (O). , The variable display of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to each reserved storage information itself is executed in a reduced mode (small symbol mode) in the lower right corner of the screen.

In the specific effect, when the variable display is executed for the second reserved storage information (in this example, the second reserved storage information) for which the look-ahead effect symbol 94 is the target of the combination of the jackpot symbols, FIG. 29 (O) shows. As shown above, the display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 that are variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the screen become the jackpot display result, and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 that is continuously displayed in the center of the screen is enlarged and emphasized. .. As a result, in the specific effect, the effect of notifying that the small hit (big hit via the small hit) or the big hit (symbol 15R time-saving big hit) suggested in the suggestion effect is performed is performed. The judgment effect video, which is continuously displayed as a series of movie images from the start of the specific effect, is terminated when the jackpot display is executed and the specific effect ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (O). To.

By executing such a specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), a change effect is executed according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is executed. By changing the production mode, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by the fun of the production.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect and the hold in the specific effect are executed by executing the change effect in connection with the increase in the number of reserved storage information due to the winning promotion effect. It is possible to make the player clearly recognizable the relationship with the number of stored information. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect from ending without executing the change effect in the specific effect.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, a change is performed by executing a reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines according to an increase in the number of second reserved storage information. It is possible to make the relationship between the effect and the number of second reserved storage information visually easy to understand.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, the number of reach lines of the same "7" symbol is increased according to the increase in the number of reserved storage information, so that the type of reach mode can be changed. It is possible to facilitate the development and design of the production control, for example, it is not necessary to consider the production pattern regarding the expectation level that is advantageous to the player, such as different expectations that are advantageous to the player. In addition, as the number of reach symbols increases, players will pay attention to specific effects with a certain sense of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 30, by allowing the suggested effect period to be executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of reach lines, the development design of the effect control can be facilitated.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and 29 (H), the winning promotion effect is terminated when the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4), thereby suppressing unnecessary promotion effects. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the production.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), by executing a specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a judgment effect movie, the game is played by the effect. It is possible to improve the interest of.

In the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the suggestion effect, the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect symbol 94 are not stopped in a predetermined order. You may make the effect of stopping at the same time at one time.

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the suggestion effect, when the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect symbol 94 are stopped, the operation means image such as the button image is displayed. It is displayed to display an operation promotion such as a "press" image, and the suggestion effect symbol 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the movement of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.), or once. You may make an effect to stop at the same time.

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the suggestion effect, when the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect symbol 94 are stopped, the operation means image such as the button image is displayed. It may or may not be displayed, and the rate set so that the player is more likely to be in a favorable state (for example, a small hit or a big hit) than when the displayed one is not displayed. After displaying the operation means image and displaying the operation promotion such as the "press" image, the suggestion effect symbol 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the movement of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.). Alternatively, it may be produced to stop at the same time at one time.

Further, in the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, after the start of the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), the reserved storage information as shown in FIGS. 29 (C) to 29 (G) is supported one by one. When the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the maximum "4" without executing the changed effect, or when the second predetermined period elapses, the reach corresponding to the second reserved storage information during that period is reached. It is also possible to execute an effect of forming a display that collectively forms reach lines by a symbol (a display that increases the number of reach lines at one time).

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second reserved storage information is obtained for the effect suggesting that the suggestion effect is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R time-saving big hit). An example of suggesting in the order corresponding to the order of occurrence is shown. However, not limited to this, the second reserved storage information is generated at the start of the suggestion effect in the order of executing the effect suggesting that it is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R time-saving big hit). Random selection may be made regardless of the order in which they were made.

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the small hit (big hit via the small hit) or the big hit (design) is performed by simply performing the effect of deriving and displaying the variation display result of each reach line in the suggestion effect. It was suggested that it would be a 15R time saving jackpot), but not only such variable display results, but also predetermined effects such as battle effects (effects in which ally characters and enemy characters fight) and reach line display results. It may be executed in combination with the derivation effect. For example, the image of the battle effect is displayed before the display result of each reach line is derived and displayed, and when the ally character wins, it becomes a combination of big hit symbols, and when the ally character loses, it becomes a combination of shift symbols. A combination of productions may be used. Such a combination of effects may be executed at a turning point, for example, the combination of effects may be executed twice for the first reach line and the last reach line, and only the last reach line may be produced. You may execute the combination of. In addition, the timing for executing the combination of effects may be randomly selected. Further, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be different depending on whether the expectation is high for a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit) and when the expectation is low. There are times when such a combination of effects is not executed and when it is executed, and when it becomes a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit), even if it is executed with a 100% probability. Well, it may not be executed when it is not a small hit or a big hit. Further, as the timing at which the effect of such a combination is executed approaches the final reach line, the expectation may be higher if it is a small hit or a big hit. If it is possible to execute the production by such various combinations, the variation of the production is enriched, and the fun of the production can improve the fun of the game.

Further, in the suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J), when the reach symbol becomes a combination of out-of-reach symbols, the combination of the symbols may be deleted from the screen thereafter.

Next, the first specific effect process for executing the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 in the effect symbol changing process (S802) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first processing of the specific effect. The first specific effect process of FIG. 31 is configured and executed as a part of the process during effect symbol change (S802).

In the first process of the specific effect, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot (. S881).

In the game control microcomputer 560, as the variation pattern to be selected at the time of variation display, there is a special effect pattern as an effect pattern that is always selected at the time of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot. It is provided. In the game control microcomputer 560, in the variation pattern setting process (S301) of FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. When the processing step and the processing step determine that it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the variation pattern of the variation display at that time is described above. It includes a processing step of selecting a special variation pattern and a processing step of transmitting a variation pattern command for designating the selected special variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In S881, by confirming whether or not the special variation pattern as described above has been received based on the data in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103, the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot.

In S881, in the determination of whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, if it is determined that there is no such display, the process is terminated and it is determined that there is. At the time, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start time of the variable display (S882). When it is determined in S882 that it is the start of the variable display, the display of the determination start effect is started and the display of the determination effect moving image is started (S883), and the process is terminated, as shown in FIG. 29 (A). On the other hand, when it is determined in S882 that it is not the start time of the variation display, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the determination start effect by checking the time elapsed from the start time of the determination start effect (S884). ..

When it is determined in S884 that it is the end of the determination start effect, the display of the determination start effect is terminated (S885). Then, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), a series of effects for displaying the reach line with the “7” symbol as shown in FIG. 29 (C) are started (S886), and the process is performed. finish. If the number of second reserved storage information is not "0" at the start of the specific effect and there are several, the initial value of the second reserved storage information is displayed when the first reach line is displayed. Display the reach line of numbers.

When it is determined in S884 that it is not the end of the determination start effect, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 based on confirming whether or not it is the time of receiving the second start winning designation command. It is determined whether or not there is (S887). When it is determined in S887 that it is the start winning number, the starting winning number counter as a counting means for counting the starting winning number to the second starting winning opening 14 during the specific effect is updated by +1 addition (S888). The start winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 when executing a specific effect. The start winning number counter counts the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 with the number of second reserved storage information (for example, “0” or the like) at the start of the specific effect as an initial value. Next, the change effects as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G) are executed according to the number of start prizes counted by the start prize counter updated in S888 (S888), and the process is terminated.

When it is determined in S887 that it is the start winning, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the winning promotion notification effect (S890). In S890, the value of the start winning number counter has reached the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information, or the execution period of the predetermined promotion notification effect (the above-mentioned second predetermined period) has ended. When at least one of the above is satisfied, it is determined that the winning promotion notification effect has ended. When it was determined by S890 that it was the end of the winning promotion notification effect, the winning promotion notification effect was terminated (S891) as shown in FIG. 29 (H), and was stored in the look-ahead process (S501) of FIG. The current second hold storage information (holding storage information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14) is acquired (S892). Then, based on the acquired second reserved storage information, the process of starting the suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J) is executed in (S893), and the process is terminated.

Specifically, in S893, for the currently changing effect symbols 91, 92, 93, the symbol jackpot (symbol 15R time-saving jackpot) or small hit (via small hit 16 (15) R) is based on the received display result command. It is determined whether or not the command is 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit), and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the second reserved storage information is acquired. Based on the second reserved storage information, each reserved storage information is a symbol big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) or a small hit (via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) R time saving big hit, small hit. It is determined whether or not the hit route is 5 (4) R time saving big hit). Then, in S893, among the reach symbols displayed on the effect display device 9, the one corresponding to the second reserved storage information which is the symbol big hit or the small hit is the big hit symbol. The combination (777) is displayed, and for the one corresponding to the second reserved storage information that is out of order, the effect of displaying the combination of outlier symbols (combination other than 777) is executed in order for each displayed reach symbol. The production pattern to be performed is determined, and the determined production is started.

In addition, in the suggestion effect, an effect different from the effect of deriving the display result on the reach line such as a specific chance-up notice may be executed together, and when such another effect is also executed, in S893. The production pattern is selected and determined, and the execution is started. For example, when executing a chance-up notice (big hit expectation is blue <green <red <gold) to change the background image color to blue, green, red, gold, etc. according to the expectation of a small hit or a big hit. , The content of the second reserved storage information is confirmed, and a predetermined chance-up notice data table (a data table in which the selection ratio of the background image is different depending on whether or not there is the second reserved storage information of a small hit or a big hit, etc. ), The process of selecting and determining the background image color may be performed.

When it is determined by S890 that it is not the end of the winning promotion notification effect, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the suggestion effect by confirming whether or not it is the end of the currently executing variation display. (S894). When it is determined in S894 that it is not the end of the suggestion effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S894 that it is the end of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is terminated (S895), the specific effect execution flag is set (S896), and the process is terminated.

The specific effect execution flag set in S896 is a flag indicating whether or not the specific effect is being executed, and is provided for the following purposes. First, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), when the display result of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is displayed during the execution of the specific effect. It is confirmed by S803 of FIG. 19 whether or not the specific effect execution flag is set, and when it is set, the variation display result at the end of the variation display in the effect mode of the specific effect as shown in FIG. 29 (K). Is displayed. Secondly, in the production period of the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, after the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is completed, FIGS. 29 (L) to (L). It is used to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the second process of the specific effect shown in FIG. 30 when the variable display based on the second reserved storage information as shown in O) is executed.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second processing of the specific effect. The second specific effect process of FIG. 32 is configured and executed as a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

In the second processing of the specific effect, first, in order to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the flag for executing the specific effect is set (S901). If the specific effect executing flag is not set in S901, the process ends. On the other hand, when the fixed effect executing flag is set in S901, the effect data required to execute the variation display in the variation mode at the time of the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to 29 (O) is displayed. Set (S902). Then, the start winning number counter is subtracted by "-1" (S903). By subtracting the start winning number counter in S903, whether or not the second reserved storage information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is digested by the variable display. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the start winning number counter has become "0" (S904). The fact that the start prize number counter has become "0" means that all of the reserved memory information accumulated during the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot has been digested. Shows. If the start winning number counter is not "0" in S904, the process ends. On the other hand, when the start winning number counter is "0" in S904, the flag during execution of the specific effect is reset (S905), the display of the determination effect movie is terminated (S905), and the process is terminated. As a result, the specific effect ends when all of the reserved storage information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is exhausted.

[Explanation of feature units 244F and 245F]
Next, the feature portions 244F and 245F of the present embodiment will be described. Regarding the feature units 244F and 245F, the effect control microcomputer 100 is in a time saving state after the end of various big hit big hit gaming states as shown in FIG. 2 (for example, in the case of the symbol 15R time saving big hit, the second special symbol variation 7). Execution of display control to display the remaining number of fluctuations that can be executed (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining number of time reductions) during the number of times or the first and second special symbol fluctuations (time reduction state, etc., which is continuously executed up to a total of 11 times). Then, various characteristic display control techniques for the display control will be described.

Regarding the feature unit 244F, the number of remaining time reductions for the second variation display (hereinafter, also referred to as the second variable display or the second special symbol variation) executed based on the second hold storage during the time reduction state is displayed. When the first variable display (hereinafter, also referred to as the first variable display or the first special symbol variation) executed based on the first reserved storage is executed, the first display control is executed as the display control. An example and a second display control example will be described.

As a first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the time reduction remaining number of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving remaining number is not displayed. The display control to be performed will be described.

As a second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the time reduction remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the first variable display is executed. A display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions will be described.

For various jackpots as shown in FIG. 2, the game control microcomputer 560 has the first variable display and the total number of second variable displays in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (for example, 11). The first condition (for example, 7 times, etc.) and the second number of times (for example, 7 times, etc.) that the number of times of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state became less than the first number of times became. The control for terminating the time saving state is executed based on the fact that one of the conditions is satisfied.

Regarding the feature unit 245F, regarding the display of the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time saving state, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second. When the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the condition is satisfied is exceeded, the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time saving state, and at least until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display of the above is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the total number of times is used as the remaining number of times. The display control to be displayed will be described.

The effect control microcomputer 100 displays on the effect display device 9 the remaining number of variable displays (time reduction remaining number) of the special symbol that can be executed during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and according to the game situation. , Executes the display control of the remaining number of times.

[First display control example]
FIG. 33-1 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing a first display control example of the number of remaining time reductions. In FIGS. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of the effect mode in the time-saving state after the end of the big-hit gaming state of the symbol 15R time-saving big hit (see FIG. 2). In FIG. 33-1 during the time saving state, after the variation display of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H), the jackpot display result is derived and displayed as shown in (I). A control example is shown.

As an example, the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving jackpot is the first condition that the total number of times of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change during the time saving state is 11 times, and the time saving. It ends based on the condition of either one of the second condition that the number of times of the second special symbol change in the state is 7 times is satisfied. Hereinafter, in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change, which is the first condition of the time saving end condition, is referred to as "total remaining number of times", and is referred to as the second condition of the time saving end condition. The remaining number of times only for a certain second special symbol change is called the "second special symbol remaining number of times".

As shown in FIG. 33-1 (A), when the big hit game state ends, the time saving start display image 98 showing the character "chance time rush" is displayed, and it is notified that the time saving state is started. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (A) to (H), a right-handed image 97 instructing (promoting) to hit right (aiming to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14) during the time saving state. Is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), at the start of the time saving state (total remaining number of times 11 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7 times), as an image showing the remaining number of times in the time saving state, "remaining 7 times". The time-saving remaining number of times image 96 indicating is displayed. The time-saving remaining number image 96 displaying "remaining 7 times" shows the remaining number of times only for the second special symbol variation, which is the second condition of the time-saving end condition.

In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the number of remaining times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the second special figure is left as the time saving remaining number. Display the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. do. Further, in the time saving state, when the total number of remaining times until the first condition is satisfied and the number of remaining times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied are the same, the remaining number of times of the second special figure is the remaining number of time saving. Display the number of times.

When the total number of remaining times until the first condition is satisfied and the number of remaining times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied are the same, the total number of remaining times may be displayed as the time saving remaining number.

In this example, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the second special figure is displayed as the remaining number of time reduction. When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times.

To give a specific example, the following time-saving remaining number of times is displayed. For example, "total remaining number 11 times, second special figure remaining number 7 times" in FIG. 33-1 (B), "total remaining number 10 times, second special figure remaining number 7 times" in FIG. 33-1 (E). , Fig. 33-1 (F), (G), "Total remaining number 9 times, 2nd special figure remaining number 6 times", when the total remaining number exceeds the 2nd special figure remaining number As the number of remaining time reductions, the number of remaining times of the second special figure such as "remaining 7 times" in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (E) and "remaining 6 times" in FIGS. 33-1 (F) and (G) is used. The number of remaining time reductions is displayed as an image 96. On the other hand, when the total remaining number is less than the second special figure remaining number as in "total remaining number 4 times, second special figure remaining number 5 times" in FIG. 33-1 (H), the time saving remaining number is set. The total remaining number of times, such as “4 times remaining” in FIG. 33-1 (H), is displayed in the time-saving remaining number image 96.

At the start of the time-saving state, the combination of the jackpot symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed as the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90. It is displayed as an initial display image, and then the variable display of the time saving state according to the starting prize is executed. In the first variable display (first special symbol variation) in the time-saving state, the symbols of the previous variable display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 as shown in FIG. 33-1 (B) are displayed for 2 to 3 seconds. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (C), the motion is shaken on the spot, and as shown in FIG. 33-1 (D), the variable display result of this time is immediately derived and displayed. On the other hand, in the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E), (G), and (H), the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 scroll the time saving pattern. It is executed in an effect mode in which the variable display result is derived and displayed by performing a variable operation for 4 to 5 seconds on the display (display of a downward arrow in the figure).

The average fluctuation time of the first variable display in the time-reduced state and the average fluctuation time of the second variable display in the time-reduced state are different times (first variable display> second variable display, or first. The variable display <second variable display) may be set, or the same time (same time) may be set. Further, the first variable display in the time saving state may be a scroll display of the time saving pattern as in the second variable display.

In the effect display device 9, variable display (any variable display mode such as symbol scroll display, symbol switching display, etc.) is performed corresponding to each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93, and the effect symbols 91, 92. A constantly changing small symbol 90 composed of three small symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, which derives and displays the display result corresponding to each of, and 93, is displayed. The constantly changing small symbol 90 is variably displayed in such a manner that the symbol always fluctuates during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, regardless of the display mode in which the effect symbol is displayed. By displaying such a constantly changing small symbol 90, for example, even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the effect symbol displays 91, 92, and 93 are fluctuating as shown in FIG. 33-1 (C). , The display state of the constantly changing small symbol 90 clearly indicates that the variable display is being displayed, and clearly indicates the variable display result. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (I), when the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 becomes the big hit display result, the display result of the constantly changing small symbol 90 also becomes the big hit display result, and it is called "big hit!". Such a jackpot notification image 99 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the time saving state. Occasionally, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is temporarily erased during the variable display period (variable time) of the first variable display (the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure). ), Then, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E), the time saving remaining number image 96 is redisplayed without updating the display of the time saving remaining number at the start of execution of the next second variable display (second special symbol variation). By doing so, display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), if the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. Since it is possible to control the display so that the number of times is not displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to (E), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the first variable display is executed. By erasing the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the erased remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to control the display so that the remaining number of times is not displayed. , Since the effect suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated by erasing and redisplaying the display of the remaining number of times, the remaining number of times of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further uncomfortable for the player. Can be displayed without giving.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining number of times is satisfied. The number of remaining times of the second special figure is displayed as. Then, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

FIG. 33-2 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to execute the effect display of the number of remaining time reductions shown in FIG. 33-1. FIG. 33-2 (A) shows a process (time saving remaining number display process A) for controlling the display of the time saving remaining number at the start of fluctuation, and FIG. 33-2 (B) shows the time saving remaining number at the time of stopping the fluctuation. The process of controlling the display (the process of stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol) is shown.

The time saving remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2 (A) is a process performed as a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in FIG.

First, at the time of this variation display, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the variation display (first variable display) of the first special symbol in the state where the second special figure remaining number of times is displayed in the time saving state (1). S911). In S911, it is determined whether or not the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state by confirming whether or not the second special figure remaining number display flag set by S928 described later is set. .. Then, in S911, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the confirmation of whether or not the first special symbol variation designation command of FIG. 7 has been received.

In S911, if it is not the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the remaining number of times of the second special symbol is displayed in the time saving state, the process ends. On the other hand, in S911, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the state where the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed during the current variation display. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), it is a setting for executing an effect of temporarily erasing (the part indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure) during the variable display period of the first variable display. The remaining number display is set to be erased (S912), and the processing is finished. Next, the time saving remaining number is not redisplayed by the start of execution of the second variable display (second special symbol variation). In addition, in the time saving remaining number display erasure setting of S912, in addition to the effect of temporarily erasing the time saving remaining number image 96 for the time saving remaining number image 96, the second variable display is performed again as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E). It may be a setting for executing an effect to be displayed.

When the time saving remaining number display erasure setting is made in this way, in the effect symbol changing process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stop processing (S803) of FIG. 19, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number image 96. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while the image is being displayed, the effect of erasing the time-saving remaining number of times image 96 is as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D). Will be executed. On the other hand, in S911, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the variation display of the first special symbol in the state where the remaining number of times of the second special figure is displayed in the time saving state, S912 is not executed. 2 When the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed when the remaining number of special symbols is displayed, or when the variation display of the first separate symbol is displayed when the total number of remaining counts is displayed in the time saving state. When the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the time-saving remaining number of times image 96 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E) to (H).

The effect symbol fluctuation stop process of FIG. 33-2 (B) is a process configured to be able to execute the display control of the time saving remaining number shown in FIG. 33-1 in the effect symbol change stop process of S803 of FIG. be.

In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (S921). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the stop symbol display flag is not set, the stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) determined in advance for the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90. Is controlled to stop and display (S922).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol that becomes a jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a big hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the symbol is not a big hit, it is confirmed whether or not the symbol is a small hit (that is, whether or not the small hit display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a small hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when it is not a symbol that is a small hit, that is, when it is a missed symbol, it is the remaining number of totals of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which are the first conditions of the time saving end condition. Is confirmed (S925).

The "total remaining number of times" is a first special symbol that differs depending on the type of jackpot as shown in FIG. 2 when a counting area for counting the total remaining number of times is provided in the RAM 103 and the jackpot gaming state ends in the counting area. The first symbol variation specification command and the second are transmitted when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol variation is set as the initial value of the "total remaining number" and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives any of the second symbol variation designation commands transmitted when the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the operation of subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such a calculation of the "total remaining number of times" is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, for example, as in the command analysis process (S704) of FIG. In S925, the "total remaining number of times" is confirmed by confirming the data of the "total remaining number of times" calculated in this way.

Next, the "second special symbol remaining number", which is the remaining number of times only for the second special symbol change, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is confirmed (S926). The "second special figure remaining number of times" is a type of big hit as shown in FIG. 2 when a counting area for counting the second special figure remaining number of times is provided in the RAM 103 and the big hit game state ends in the counting area. When the maximum value of the number of times only the second special symbol change, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is set as the initial value of the "second special symbol remaining number", and the change display of the second special symbol is executed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the second symbol variation designation command transmitted to, the operation of subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such a calculation of the "second special figure remaining number of times" is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, for example, as in the command analysis process (S704) of FIG. In S926, the "second special figure remaining number of times" is confirmed by confirming the data of the "second special figure remaining number of times" calculated in this way.

Next, as the remaining number of times in the time saving state, it is confirmed whether or not the "total remaining number" confirmed in S925 is equal to or greater than the "second remaining number of special figures" confirmed in S926 (S927). When the "total remaining number of times" is equal to or greater than the "second special figure remaining number" in S927, the second special figure remaining number confirmed in S926 is displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 (S928), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (F), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is displayed with the second special figure remaining number, which is the remaining number of the second special symbol variation. Further, in S928, the second special figure remaining number display flag indicating that the second special figure remaining number of times is displayed in the time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the "total remaining number" is less than the "second special figure remaining number" in S927, the total remaining number confirmed in S925 is displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 (S929), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (H), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as the "total remaining number" which is the remaining number of the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. Further, in S929, a total remaining number display flag indicating that the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. In S930, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S930), and the process is terminated.

Further, the stop symbol display flag is set in S931 depending on whether it is determined in S921 that the stop symbol display flag is set, in S923 it is determined to be a big hit, or in S924 it is determined to be a small hit. Whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (one of the jackpot start 1 designated command reception flag to the jackpot start 5 designated command reception flag) is set to indicate that the jackpot start designation command has been received. Confirm (S932).

If it is determined in S932 that the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S934). Then, preparations are made for executing the jackpot display for producing a fanfare effect for the jackpot (S934). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S935), and the process ends. As the preparation settings for executing the jackpot display, for example, the selection of the process table for executing the jackpot display such as the fanfare effect corresponding to the jackpot type, the start of the process timer, and the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the process data. Etc., the execution of the control of the effect device such as, etc. is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S932 that the big hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the small hit start designation command reception flag (first small hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is received. -It is confirmed whether or not (one of the third small hit start designation command reception flags) is set (S936).

If it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S937). Then, the preparation setting for executing the small hit display for performing the fanfare effect for the small hit is made (S938). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (S808) (S939), and the process ends. As the preparation settings for executing the small hit display, for example, the selection of the process table for executing the small hit display such as the fanfare effect for the small hit, the start of the process timer, and the effect display device according to the contents of the process data. The execution of the control of the effect device such as 9 is started.

By executing the processes of S924 to S929 among such effect symbol change stop processes, the display control of the time saving remaining number as shown in FIG. 33-1 is executed in the effect symbol change stop process. Can be done.

[Second display control example]
FIG. 33-3 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing a second display control example of the number of remaining time reductions. In FIG. 33-3, similarly to FIGS. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of the effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit (see FIG. 2). Has been done. In FIG. 33-2, after the variation display of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times as shown in FIGS. (A) to (H) during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. A control example in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed is shown in.

FIG. 33-3 differs from FIG. 33-1 in that the following display control is executed. As shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is usually displayed in red (the color of the time-saving remaining number image 96 is expressed by the characters "(red)" in the figure). The color (normal color). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the time saving state, the first variable display (first special symbol variation). When is executed, the color of the time-saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the standard color of red to blue during the variable display period of the first variable display as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D). The display control for changing to a special color and not updating the display of the time saving remaining number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D), the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 in the time saving state. In this case, it is possible to control the display without updating the display of the remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the first variable display is executed. By changing the color of the remaining number of time reduction images 96, it is suggested that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time reduction state can be further reduced by the player. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining number of times is satisfied. The number of remaining times of the second special figure is displayed as. Then, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

FIG. 33-4 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to execute the effect display of the number of remaining time reductions shown in FIG. 33-3. FIG. 33-4 (A) shows a process for controlling the display of the number of time reductions at the start of fluctuation (time reduction remaining number display process B), and FIG. 33-4 (B) shows the display of the number of time reductions at the time of stoppage of fluctuation. The process of controlling (the process of stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol) is shown.

The time-reduced remaining number display process B in FIG. 33-4 (A) is a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in FIG. 19, similarly to the time-reduced remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2 (A). It is a process performed as a process.

The process shown in FIG. 33-4 is different from the process shown in FIG. 33-2 in FIG. 33-4 (A), and FIG. 33-4 (B) is different from FIG. 33-2 (B). It is the same process. The time saving remaining number display process B in FIG. 33-4 (A) is different from the time saving remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2 (A) in S911, and the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state. When it is the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state of being in the state, the variable display of the first variable display is shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D) during the current variable display. During the period, the time saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the standard color of red to the special color of blue, and the setting for executing the effect of not updating the display of the time saving remaining number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96. A certain time reduction remaining number display update limit setting is set (S912A), and the process is terminated.

In this way, when the time saving remaining number display update limit setting is set, in the effect symbol change processing (S802) and the effect symbol change stop processing (S803) of FIG. 19, the time saving remaining number image 96 is the second special figure remaining number. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as a red standard. The color is changed to a special color of blue, and the effect of not updating the display of the remaining time reduction number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 is executed.

In FIG. 33-4 (B), similarly to FIG. 33-2 (B), by executing the processes of S924 to S929 and the like, the time reduction as shown in FIG. 33-3 in the effect symbol fluctuation stop process. Display control of the remaining number of times can be executed.

In addition, in the 1st display control example of FIG. 33-1 and the 2nd display control example of FIG. The state in which the combination of symbols (“333” in this example) is stopped and displayed in the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90 is continuously displayed as the initial display image at the start of the effect in the time-saving state. After that, an example is shown in which when the first variable display is executed, the design of the previous variable display result shakes on the spot to derive and display the current display result. However, not limited to this, at the start of the production of the time saving state (at the time of entering the chance time), the combination of the jackpot symbols that triggered the start of the time saving state is not always, but the off-target symbol such as "123" is always used. After displaying the combination of (so-called random stitches, etc.), the variable display in the time saving state may be executed.

In general, if the effect symbol is swaying on the spot in the state of the jackpot symbol combination, the player misunderstands that the variable display result of this time is displayed as the display result of the jackpot symbol combination. In some cases. Therefore, in order to prevent such a misunderstanding, it is sufficient to display the combination of the out-of-order symbols at the start of the effect in the time-saving state, and then execute the variable display in the time-saving state. By doing so, even if the first variable display is executed for the first time in the time-saving state and the display result is an out-of-order display result, the effect of changing from the out-of-order display result to another out-of-order display result is performed. Therefore, when the first variable display is executed as the first variable display at the start of the effect in the time-saving state, the combination of the jackpot symbols of, for example, "333", which is shaking on the spot, suddenly becomes ". It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when changing to the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "334".

In addition, at the start of the production in the time-saving state (when the chance time is entered), the combination of the jackpot symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time-saving state is the production symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constant fluctuation is small. The state in which the symbol 90 is stopped and displayed is continuously displayed as the initial display image at the start of the effect in the time-saving state, and then the combination of the jackpot symbols shakes on the spot, resulting in an off-display result. Even when the variable display is executed, the combination of the jackpot symbols may be maintained and displayed as the variable display result this time. In that case, since the effect symbol is only a symbol for effect, for example, other effect display devices 9 such as the fourth symbol capable of indicating whether or not the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Due to the specific symbol displayed in the area, in the execution of the first variable display, the effect symbol that is shaking is being displayed in a variable manner, and the effect symbol that is stopped is off display result and jackpot display result. It suffices if it is possible to indicate which of the above.

[Example of lock display control for updating the remaining number of times]
Next, as in the second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. In the case of display control that does not update the number of times display, as an example of superimposing a predetermined image suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving state is not updated on the time saving remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number update lock display control is used. explain.

FIG. 33-5 is an enlarged view of a display area in the vicinity of the time-reduced remaining number image 96 showing an example of the time-reduced remaining number update lock display control. For example, in the second display control example as shown in FIG. 33-3, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 96 as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). In addition, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the display of the remaining number of times of the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated. As shown in FIG. 33-5, in the time saving remaining number update lock display control example, when the display of the remaining number of the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated in this way, the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving state is not updated. As a predetermined image to be suggested, a lock image 96A having transparency and capable of suggesting that the time-saving remaining number image 96 is not updated by surrounding the periphery of the time-saving remaining number image 96 is superimposed on the time-saving remaining number image 96. Display control to display is performed. A part of the lock image 96A includes character information such as "LOCK" which suggests that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. It should be noted that the character information suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times such as "LOCK" is not updated may not be included in the lock image 96A.

Such superimposed display of the lock image 96A may be executed, for example, by setting display in the time saving remaining number update limit display setting of S912A in FIG. 33-4 (A).

As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number is executed. By performing display control such as the lock image 96A in which a predetermined image suggesting that the remaining number of times is not updated is superimposed and displayed on the image 96, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be further played. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

The image to be superimposed and displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be an image having high transparency or an image having low transparency, and the remaining number display on the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be visually recognized to some extent. Anything that is possible will do. Further, as the image to be superimposed and displayed on the time-reduced remaining number image 96, it is possible to visually recognize that the time-reduced remaining number image 96 itself is displayed, but the numerical value of the remaining number may not be visible. Further, the image to be superimposed and displayed on the time-reduced remaining number image 96 may be either an image that covers the time-reduced remaining number image 96 or an image that covers a part of the time-reduced remaining number image 96.

[First display control restriction example]
Next, when the first variable display is executed while the above-mentioned first display control, that is, the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. A first display control limitation example as a control for adding a limitation to a display control for not displaying the number of times will be described.

As described above, when displaying the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time-saving state in the time-saving state, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is set. It has been described that when the number of remaining times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display, the remaining number of times of the total number of times is displayed instead of the remaining number of times of the second variable display.

Therefore, when the remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the first variable It is considered that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of discomfort even if the display is not controlled so as not to display the remaining number of times when the display is executed. In addition, it is not necessary to prevent the display of the remaining number of times when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display is displayed. Be done. As a result, when the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the remaining number of times in the variable display time reduction state during the time reduction state, at least the total of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, even if the first variable display is executed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D). Time saving Remaining number of times The control for limiting the first display control is executed by controlling the remaining number of times in the image 96 not to be erased.

In such a first display control restriction example, the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the remaining number of times of the second number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When it is less than, even if the first variable display is executed, the display control is restricted so as not to display the remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of times is displayed according to the gaming state. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Specific notification example]
Next, a specific notification example that can be commonly executed for the display control of the remaining number of variable displays executed during the time saving state described above will be described. As described above, the specific notification is the end condition of the time-saving state based on the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display, and the end condition of the time-saving state based on the number of times of the second variable display. When the number of times of the first variable display is increased, the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation as much as possible, the first variable display is executed in the time saving state. This is a notification executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to specially promote the execution of the second variable display based on the number of times of the first variable display having become a specific number or more.

FIG. 33-6 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing a specific notification example. In FIG. 33-6, when the specific number of times is set to, for example, 4 times and the first variable display, which is less than the specific number of times, such as 3 times, is executed during the time saving state, FIG. 33-6 (A). ), The specific notification is not executed. On the other hand, when the first variable display of a specific number of times is executed, for example, four times in the short state, a part of the right-handed image 97 is directed to the right as shown in FIG. 33-6 (B). The right-handed enhanced image 97A, in which the arrow image is displayed much larger than the right-pointing arrow image of the right-handed image 97 in FIG. 33-6 (A), executes specific notification that strongly promotes right-handed striking. Further, as the specific notification, a voice different from the voice output when the normal right-handed image 97 is displayed (for example, a loud voice, a voice such as a warning sound, and a voice such as a warning sound, which is disadvantageous to the player unless the right-handed image 97 is displayed. Each of the special voices such as the voice indicating that the state is reached, and the combination, etc.) are output. Further, as the specific notification, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body such as various lamps provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different from the light emitting mode of the normal right-handed image 97 (for example, light emission having a large light volume). , Each of the special light emission modes such as light emission with different emission colors and light emission with different blinking cycles, and combinations, etc.) are executed.

According to such a specific notification example, the first variable display and the second variable display are displayed by performing the specific notification based on the number of times of the first variable display in the time saving state becomes the specific number or more. In a game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times or the second variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state by the specific notification.

[Explanation of feature section 068SH / 069SH]
Next, an embodiment relating to the feature portions 068SH and 069SH of the present embodiment will be described. In the embodiment according to the feature unit 068SH and 069SH, the notification regarding the variable winning ball device 15 will be described. In the description of the feature unit 068SH / 069SH, the reserved storage information or the reserved storage is also referred to as the reserved information. The number of pending information is also expressed as the number of pending information. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the variable display is also referred to as a variable display.

The feature unit 068SH has a case where the number of hold information stored by the second hold storage buffer is the first number (0 to 3) and a second number (4 pieces) which is larger than the first number. , The feature is that the notification mode is different. Further, in the feature unit 069SH, when the number of reserved information stored in the second reserved storage buffer reaches the upper limit number (4) of the reserved information that can be stored in the second reserved storage buffer in a predetermined period, the upper limit number is reached. It is characterized in that it executes a arrival notification indicating that it has reached.

First, the technical background of the above-mentioned feature portions 068SH and 069SH will be described. In recent years, the specifications and gaming methods of gaming machines have diversified, and it may be difficult for players who have played with gaming machines for many years to understand the specifications and gaming methods of the gaming machines they are playing. For example, it seems that something is happening on the pachinko machine, but I don't know what is happening, where should I launch the pachinko ball, and is there any loss if I launch the pachinko ball? People may feel uneasy. In particular, this tendency is remarkable in special models such as one-kind and two-kind mixers.

If the player does not understand the game method or the like, the player may suffer a disadvantage or lose an advantageous right. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the notification by the feature portions 068SH and 069SH. In addition, the state in which the player feels anxiety not only hinders the improvement of the interest, but also makes it impossible to fully feel the original characteristics of the game machine. According to the present embodiment, since such anxiety can be eliminated, the interest of the player can be improved, and the characteristics of the game machine can be easily understood by the player, so that the player's feeling of excitement can be further enhanced. Can be done. In conventional gaming machines, right-handed or left-handed hits may be notified, but this alone lacks specificity and cannot prevent wasteful hits of the gaming ball. Hereinafter, the feature portions 068SH and 069SH will be described in detail.

FIG. 34-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 used in the description of the feature portions 068SH and 069SH as viewed from the front. The major difference between the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is that the variable display device is a drum-type pachinko gaming machine, and the LEDs indicating the number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Is provided, and LEDs for instructing right-handed and left-handed hits are provided.

As shown in FIG. 34-1, the variable display device 68SH009 of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 has a plurality of cylinders (hereinafter, also referred to as “reels”) having a plurality of types of identification information (designs) attached to the surface thereof. However, a plurality of display areas are formed in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotating the plurality of reels. The design also includes a blank design. Reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R (hereinafter, also referred to as "left reel", "middle reel", "right reel") are arranged side by side in the variable display device in the horizontal direction, and these reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R are arranged side by side. Three consecutive regions of the regions arranged in the above are arranged so as to be visible from the perspective window. In the present embodiment, the effective lines 68SHL1 (upper), 68SHL2 (middle), 68SHL3 (lower), 68SHL4 (downward to the right), 68SHL5 (upward to the right) shown by the broken line in FIG. When 7s are aligned, it becomes a big hit or a small hit.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a first hold storage display 68SH001 and a second hold storage display 68SH002, each of which is composed of four LEDs. Each LED is lit to indicate that a variable display that has not yet been started is pending. In FIG. 34-1, white circles indicate that they are not reserved, and black circles indicate that they are reserved. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 0 and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with ball hitting instruction arrows LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 lights the hitting ball instruction arrow LED68SH005L when instructing the player to hit left, and lights the hitting ball instruction arrow LED68SH005R when instructing the player to hit right. In FIG. 34-1, the mode in which the hitting instruction arrows LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R are turned off is indicated by a white arrow, and the mode in which the hitting instruction arrows LEDs are turned off is indicated by a black arrow. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1 it is shown that right-handed strike is instructed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a board lamp 68SH015. The board lamp 68SH015 is a lamp provided on the back surface of the game board 6 and irradiates the game board 6 from the back of the game board 6, and the irradiated light passes through the game board 6. The board lamp 68SH015 also illuminates around the variable winning ball device 15. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with an electric tulamp 68SH016. The electric chew lamp 68SH016 is a lamp provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and is a lamp for making the variable winning ball device 15 stand out.

As described above, the variable winning ball device 15 serves as a variable winning ball device that changes between an open state and a closed state. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 according to the feature units 068SH and 069SH, the variable winning ball device 15 has a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state. It can be changed to. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a mark "M" as a mark. The mark "M" is used for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (voice notification: "Aim at M").

FIG. 34-2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The difference from the main board (game control board) 31 shown in FIG. 3 is that the liquid crystal display device 9 is out of the configuration, the reel motor 68SH010, the reel sensor 68SH012, the reel LED68SH014, the ball striking arrow LED68SH005L, 68SH005R, and the first hold storage display. The device 68SH001 and the second hold storage display 68SH002 are included as new configurations.

The reel motor 68SH010 is controlled by a motor drive signal (phase signal of the stepping motor) output from the effect control board 80. The reel motor 68SH010 is provided corresponding to each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, so that three consecutive areas are continuously changed and displayed in the perspective window for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Then, by stopping the rotation of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, three continuous areas are derived and displayed as a display result in the see-through window 3.

The reel sensor 68SH012 is provided inside the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and detects a reference position for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The reel LED68SH014 illuminates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel from the back surface. The reel LED 68SH014 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive regions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and each region can be independently irradiated.

FIG. 34-3 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement of reels. Red 7, blue 7, promotion notification symbols, and arrival notification symbols are drawn on the reels as symbols (identification information) in a predetermined order so as to be distinguishable from each other. Of these, red 7 and blue 7 are sizes that fit within one region, while the promotion notification symbol and the arrival notification symbol are sizes that span three consecutive regions.

FIG. 34-4 (A) is a diagram showing a hit type table in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the big hit without shortening of time are provided in the big hit of the symbol. In the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction, a big hit without a symbol 5R time reduction, a big hit with 11 (10) R time reduction via a small hit, and a big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via a small hit are provided. There is. The number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened is shown in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit. The jackpot determination value described in FIG. 5B is used for determining the jackpot with the symbol 5R time reduction and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time reduction. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time reduction in this embodiment is 1/199. Similarly, the big hit determination value described with reference to FIG. 5B is used for the small hit determination. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1 / 7.35.

The jackpot via a small hit in the present embodiment includes a jackpot with a small hit via 11 (10) R time reduction and a jackpot with a small hit via 6 (5) R with a different number of rounds. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment includes a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot that are directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R). The big hit with no time reduction of the symbol 5R is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R). In the 11 (10) R time saving big hit via the small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) on condition of the V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 11 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 10 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same big hit as the symbol 10R time saving big hit. I feel it is a type. Via small hit 6 (5) R time reduction For big hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big winning opening is the same big hit type as the symbol 5R time saving big hit.

The condition for ending the time reduction state after the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction is the same as the condition described in FIG. That is, as a condition for ending the time reduction state after the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. Two conditions are set, one is the end condition of 5 times. The number of times of the end condition of the reduction of working hours such that the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is one is considered that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

There is a time reduction of symbol 5R The time reduction state after a big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 time and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 5 times. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described with reference to FIG. The reason is the same as that described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and before the jackpot game state, a maximum of four can be stored in the first start winning prize. This is to ensure that even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the above is started, the variable display of one time of the second special symbol, which is easy to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed. .. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

Symbol 5R No time reduction After a big hit, it shifts to a special normal state. The special normal state is a state in which only the effect performed by the effect control board 80 is different from the normal state. Therefore, the advantage to the player is the same as the normal state. In addition, the special normal state continues to fluctuate up to 30 times. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R time-saving big hit, via small hit 11 (10) R time-saving big hit, and via small hit 6 (5) R time-saving big hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

FIGS. 34-4 (B) and 34-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 34-4 (B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 34-4 (C) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type of the big hit via the small hit when the small hit is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (B), the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 for the jackpot type determination are "symbol 5R time reduction with jackpot" and "symbol 5R time reduction without". A big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the second special figure big hit type judgment table of FIG. 34-4 (C), the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 for the big hit type judgment are "symbol 5R time reduction with big hit" and "symbol 5R time reduction not". A big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the case of the present embodiment, "sign 5R big hit with time reduction" and "design 5R big hit without time reduction" are selected at 50% respectively.

In the big hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 34-4 (C), it is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2 for determining the big hit type, and it is "Big hit with 11 (10) R time reduction via small hit". A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "6 (5) R time saving big hit via small hit" is set. However, the jackpot types determined in the jackpot type determination table via small hits are the provisional jackpots associated with 11 (10) R time reduction and jackpot and 6 (5) R time reduction and jackpot. It is a type, and it is invalid if a V prize does not occur in the small hit game state. In the case of the present embodiment, "small hit via 11 (10) R time reduction and big hit" and "small hit via 6 (5) R time reduction and big hit" are selected at 50% respectively.

FIG. 34-5 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state. FIG. 34-5 shows the normal state, the special normal state, the big hit (design), the big hit (V winning), and the chance time as the gaming state. First, if the "big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" or the "big hit without symbol 5R time reduction" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the big hit (design) state. In the big hit (design) state, when the "big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" is completed, the chance time A shifts to. On the other hand, in the big hit (design) state, when the "design 5R time reduction no big hit" is completed, the state shifts to the above-mentioned special normal state.

If you win the "Big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" or "Big hit without symbol 5R time reduction" in the special normal state, the state shifts to the big hit (design) state. In the special normal state, when the fluctuation display of 30 times is completed, the state shifts to the normal state.

Chance time A is the above-mentioned condition, that is, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one, and the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of "sign 5R time reduction and big hit". It is a state in which the total number of times is continued until one of the two conditions of the end condition of 5 times is satisfied. Therefore, in Chance Time A, the second special symbol has a maximum of five times, including one time reduction and four fluctuations in the hold information of the second special symbol that is reserved for a maximum of four during that time reduction. Fluctuations are made.

In the chance time A, when the "sign 5R time reduction big hit" or "symbol 5R time reduction no big hit" is won by the variable display based on the hold information of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state again. In chance time A, a small hit is won, and when a V prize is generated, the state shifts to a big hit (via a small hit). On the other hand, in the chance time A, if the small hit is not won, or if the small hit is won but the V prize is not generated, the state shifts to the special normal state.

In the big hit (via small hit) state, in the big hit (design) state, when the "big hit with 11 (10) R time reduction via small hit" or the "big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via small hit" ends, the chance time Move to B.

Chance time B is the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the above-mentioned condition after the end of "11 (10) R time reduction and big hit via small hit" or "6 (5) R time reduction and big hit via small hit". It is in a state of continuing until one of two conditions, that is, the end condition that the number of times is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time B, for the second special symbol, the time reduction of 7 times and the 4 fluctuations of the hold information of the 2nd special symbol held up to 4 times during the time reduction are combined, and the maximum number of times is 11 times. Fluctuations are made.

In the chance time B, if the "sign 5R time reduction big hit" or "symbol 5R time reduction no big hit" is won by the hold information of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the chance time B, the small hit is won, and when the V prize is generated, the state shifts to the big hit (via the small hit) again. On the other hand, in the chance time B, if the small hit is not won, or if the small hit is won but the V prize is not generated, the state shifts to the special normal state.

As shown in FIG. 34-5, in the present embodiment, after the advantageous state ends, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 5 times in the case of chance time A and up to 11 times in the case of chance time B) of the upper limit or more. If it is controlled to the advantageous state again by the time it is done, it can be controlled to the special state (chance time B) after the end of the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the player is controlled to a special state each time the advantageous state is reached, so that the player's feeling of excitement can be enhanced.

34-6 and 34-7 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in the present embodiment. In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, as in FIGS. 7 and 8, the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified content of the command is shown.

In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, the names and contents of 8C02 to 8C05, A001 to A004, A301 to A304, and C401, C402, C501, and C502 are shown in FIGS. 7 according to the number of jackpot rounds in the present embodiment. And changed from FIG. Further, in FIG. 34-7, a special normal state is provided in the present embodiment, and new commands D101 to D104 are provided in order to specify opening or closing of the operating port.

FIG. 34-8 shows an example of the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode corresponds to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and the case where the variable display mode is "reach", and the variable display is also performed. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in case the result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is "missing" and the decorative symbol is displayed. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α or super reach X is executed.

FIG. 34-8 (A) shows a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. FIG. 34-8 (B) shows a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. Of the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns, P1A1-2 with time reduction after the big hit and non-reach (loss) are symbol 5R time reduction with big hit, small hit via symbol 11 (10) R time reduction with big hit, and small hit via symbol 6 (5) After the end of the big hit with R time reduction, before the change display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first special based on the hold information of the first start prize that can store up to four pieces before the big hit game state. It is a fluctuation pattern when the symbol fluctuates. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (A), the fluctuation time of P1A1-2 is 2000 ms (2 seconds).

Further, among the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns, the time reduction (loss) of P2A1-2 is a fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol executed first changes after the end of the big hit with the time reduction. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (B), the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 is 60,000 ms (60 seconds). In this way, the execution time (2 seconds) of the variable display executed based on the hold information of the first start prize after the end of the jackpot with a short time is executed based on the hold information of the second start prize after the end of the advantageous state. The time is shorter than the execution time (60 seconds) of the variable display. Even during the time reduction, the fluctuation pattern other than when the second special symbol to be executed first changes after the end of the big hit with the time reduction is a fluctuation pattern other than P2A1-2.

The fluctuation time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is also the time for increasing the number of reserved pieces to 4 in the time saving state. The period fluctuating in P2A1-2 is the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, and the number of holds stored by the second hold storage buffer. It is an example of a predetermined period for making four pieces. In one predetermined period, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state a plurality of times (three times in this embodiment). That is, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in the open state for the entire predetermined period.

In the present embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “open state notification”). Further, in the present embodiment, the promotion notification for prompting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball device 15 is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit with a short time. FIG. 34-9 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an open state notification and a promotion notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (A), the promotion notification is executed by temporarily stopping the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel. This promotion notification is also an open state notification because the variable winning ball device 15 is not notified unless it is in the open state. The arrows drawn on the right reel and the left reel indicate that the reels are moving in the direction of the arrows. Further, the middle reel is an example of the first movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. In this way, by temporarily stopping the promotion notification symbol in the notification mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of holdings stored by the second holding storage buffer in the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the big hit with a short time is the second holding storage. When the upper limit of four pending information that can be stored in the buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. FIG. 34-9 (B) is a diagram showing an example of arrival notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (B), the arrival notification is executed by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol of the right reel. The arrows drawn on the left reel and the middle reel indicate that the reels are moving in the direction of the arrows. Further, the right reel is an example of the second movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100.

As shown in FIG. 34-9 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the middle reel when the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 shifts to 60 seconds, and is stored by the second hold storage buffer. When the number of holdings reaches 4, the right reel is stopped. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player by the movable body that the predetermined period has been reached and that the second number has been reached.

In addition to the above-mentioned notification by the reel, the above-mentioned voice notification (“Aim at M”) is included in the open state notification and the promotion notification. The voice notification is performed when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state within a predetermined period. Further, the open state notification and the promotion notification include a notification for lighting the electric chew lamp 68SH016 in order to make the variable winning ball device 15 stand out (hereinafter, also referred to as “promotion lamp notification”). Further, for the open state notification and the promotion notification, the board surface lamp 68SH015 is turned off (hereinafter, also referred to as “board surface off”) to make the light from the electric chew lamp 68SH016 relatively bright, so that the variable winning ball device 15 There is also a turn-off notification that makes the light stand out.

Whether or not these various notifications are executed depends on the number of reserved second special symbols. Further, depending on whether or not a specific period (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, which is half of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2) has elapsed since the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the big hit with a short time has started. Also changes. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 has different notification modes depending on whether or not a specific period has elapsed, depending on whether the number of holds stored by the second hold storage buffer is 0 to 3 or 4. .. Here, the difference in the notification mode means that, in the case of the present embodiment, the combination of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the board extinguishing is different. Further, the specific period is a period for notifying the player that the remaining time available for starting and winning the variable winning ball device 15 is short.

FIG. 34-10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reserved pieces and the notification mode. FIG. 34-10 shows execution conditions for voice notification, promotion lamp notification, and board extinguishing. In FIGS. 34-10, circles indicate execution and crosses indicate no execution. The voice notification is executed regardless of whether or not the specific period has elapsed when the number of reserved pieces is 0 to 3, and is not executed when the number of held pieces is 4. The facilitation lamp notification is executed for the entire period of the predetermined period. The board turning off is executed when the number of reserved pieces is 0 to 3 and after a specific period has elapsed, and is not executed when the number of reserved pieces is 4 or before the specified period has elapsed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification mode differs depending on whether the number of reserved pieces is 0 to 3 or 4. When the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the number of holdings has not reached 4, so at least voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed to urge the player to start winning the variable winning ball device 15. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when the number of holdings reaches 4, the number of holdings cannot be increased more than this. Therefore, by performing only the promotion lamp notification, the player can compare with the notification mode when the number of holdings is 0 to 3. It is a notification mode that is difficult for people to recognize. As a result, the notification has changed from an easy-to-recognize notification to a difficult-to-recognize notification, so that the player can more reliably recognize that the number of reserved pieces has reached 4, and fires the game medium when the number of reserved pieces is 4. You can make yourself unaware of that. In this case, the player can stop the firing of the game medium by, for example, releasing his hand from the ball striking operation handle 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and a specific period has elapsed, all of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the board turning off are performed to make the player more open to the player and the variable winning ball device 15. It is possible to appeal to encourage the winning of the game medium. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. As described above, in the present embodiment, the promotion notification for prompting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball device 15 is executed in the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, and the number of stored information is stored in the predetermined period. When the upper limit of 4 pieces of hold information that can be stored in the second hold storage buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Specifically, the player can firmly enjoy the lottery with the second special symbol.

Each of the above-described notifications and the like will be described using a timing chart. FIG. 34-11 is a timing chart showing aspects of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “arrival effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel” during the time reduction. Of these, the "arrival effect" is an effect in which the arrival notification is performed by voice when the number of reserved pieces reaches 4, but as will be described later, the notification can be performed in a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. be. FIG. 34-11 shows, as an example, a timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after a big hit with a short time is 0. Therefore, the change of the first special symbol does not occur before the change of the second special symbol. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34-11, the number of reserved pieces is 3 before the lapse of the specific period, and the number of held pieces is 4 after the lapse of the specific period.

As shown in FIG. 34-11, when the big hit with a short time is completed and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above. In addition, in FIG. 34-11, it is simplified so that the fluctuation starts immediately after the big hit ends, but in reality, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit after the big hit ends, and the variable winning ball device 15 starts. When a prize is won, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts according to the fluctuation pattern of P2A1-2.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the promotion notification symbol and temporarily stops at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel rotates. There is. In that state, the number of pending items will be 3 by the time the specific period expires. The section A is defined as the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the specific period. When the specific period expires, since the number of reserved lamps has not reached four at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the number of holdings reaches 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The temporary stop of the arrival notification symbol is performed for 14 seconds. Therefore, 14 seconds after the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an effect effect.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the promotion lamp notification and stops all reels. Next, various modes of notification and the like in the timing chart described with reference to FIG. 34-11 will be described.

FIG. 34-12 is a diagram showing aspects of the variable display device in the sections A and B and the achievement effect, an aspect of voice notification output from the speaker 27, and an aspect of the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015. FIG. 34-12 (A) is a diagram showing aspects of a variable display device, a voice notification, and a variable winning ball device 15 and a board lamp 68SH015 in a section A. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (A), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. "Aim for M!" Is output from the speaker 27 by voice notification. Further, since the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the area around the variable winning ball device 15 is brightened by the board lamp 68SH015.

FIG. 34-12 (B) is a diagram showing aspects of a variable display device, a voice notification, and a variable winning ball device 15 and a board lamp 68SH015 in a section B. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (B), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. "Aim for M!" Is output from the speaker 27 by voice notification. Therefore, the variable display device and the voice notification are the same as those in the section A. The difference is that the board lamp 68SH015 goes out. By turning off the board lamp 68SH015, the surroundings of the variable winning ball device 15 become dark, the variable winning ball device 15 becomes easier to recognize, and the player is urged to start winning the variable winning ball device 15. can. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed and the number of reserved information has not reached four, the effect control microcomputer 100 is before the specific period elapses. Notification is performed in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

FIGS. 34-12 (C) and 34-12 (D) are diagrams showing aspects of the variable display device, the voice, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 when the number of reserved pieces is four. The reason why the two figures are used is that when it is determined that the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state, the specific mode is different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. This is to be notified. Specifically, the sound output differs depending on whether the time-saving jackpot is controlled by the variable display of the first second special symbol after the time-saving jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as "holding ream") or not. ..

What is common to both FIGS. 34-12 (C) and (D) is that when the number of reserved pieces is 4, the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped. Then, when there is no hold ream, as shown in FIG. 34-12 (C), the speaker 27 notifies "arrival" as a arrival effect. Further, the board lamp 68SH015 lights in the same manner as in the section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol. According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

On the other hand, when there is a hold station, the speaker 27 notifies "Congratulations" as shown in FIG. 34-12 (D). Further, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit in rainbow colors, unlike the case of the section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information first executed after the advantageous state, the effect control microcomputer 100 is notified of the arrival. Notify in a specific mode (“Congratulations”) different from the notification mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state according to a specific aspect. You can enhance the feeling.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information first executed after the advantageous state, the specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification is used. Notify. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state according to a specific aspect. You can enhance the feeling.

The timing chart described with reference to FIG. 34-11 shows a timing chart when the number of reserved 1st special symbols after the big hit with time reduction is 0, but the number of reserved 1st special symbols after the big hit with time reduction is 1. There may be a case where the number of the second special symbol is 0 or more. Therefore, a timing chart will be described when the number of reserved first special symbols is one or more and the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 after a big hit with a short time.

FIG. 34-13 is a timing chart showing aspects of "voice notification", "right-handed voice notification", "promotion lamp notification", "board lamp", "reaching effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". be. Of these, the new "right-handed voice notification" is a notification that outputs a voice such as "right-handed!" And instructs right-handed. In the example shown in FIG. 34-13, the number of reserved pieces is 3 before the lapse of the specific period, and the number of held pieces is 4 after the lapse of the specific period. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, another promotion notice different from the promotion notice (“right-handed”). ! ”) Is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute other promotion notifications according to a short variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 34-13, when the big hit with a short time is completed, the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 and the number of reserved first special symbols is 1 or more, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. It will be started. With the start of this variation display, right-handed voice notification is started. On the other hand, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the voice notification (“Aim at M”) is not performed, but the promotion lamp notification is performed, and the board lamp 68SH015 is lit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, the right-handed voice notification different from the promotion notification by the voice notification is performed. Execute. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute other promotion notifications according to a short variable display time.

When the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit during the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is started and won a prize, the number of reserved second special symbols becomes one. When the change of the first special symbol ends, the change of the second special symbol held by the change pattern of P2A1-2 starts.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the promotion notification symbol and temporarily stops at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel rotates. There is. In that state, the number of pending items will be 3 by the time the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of reserved lamps has not reached four at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the number of holdings reaches 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. When 14 seconds have passed since the arrival notification symbol was temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an effect effect.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the promotion lamp notification and stops all reels.

In this embodiment, a reel is used as the variable display device. The reel is rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, but if the reel is rotated or stopped within a short time, a delay or advance may occur due to the moment of inertia of the load of the reel or the like, and the reel motor 68SH010 may step out. Therefore, in order to secure the reel stop operation time, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time (specific time) of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, the number of hold information stored by the second hold storage buffer is When the number reaches 4, the arrival notification by voice is executed without temporarily stopping the identification information.

This is because the temporary stop of the arrival notification symbol is performed for 14 seconds, so that the reels are rotated and stopped within a short time. For example, when the remaining time reaches 14.5 seconds and the number of reserved pieces reaches 4, the rotation is started after the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, but the remaining time is 0 at that time. 5 seconds. Therefore, it will stop after 0.5 seconds of rotation, and the rotation and stop will be performed within a short time.

A timing chart will be described when the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less and the number of reserved pieces reaches four.

FIG. 34-14 is a timing chart showing aspects of "voice notification", "promotion lamp notification", "board lamp", "reaching effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". In the example shown in FIG. 34-14, the number of reserved pieces is 3 before the lapse of the specific period, the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, and the number of reserved pieces is 4.

As shown in FIGS. 34-14, when the big hit with a short time is completed and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the promotion notification symbol and temporarily stops at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel rotates. There is. In that state, the number of pending items will be 3 by the time the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of reserved lamps has not reached four at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the number of holdings reaches 4 in the remaining 15 seconds or less, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 keeps the right reel arrival notification symbol rotated without temporarily stopping it, but the effect effect is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time of the predetermined period is equal to or less than the specific time, the number of reserved information stored in the second reserved storage buffer is the number of reserved information that can be stored in the second reserved storage buffer. When the upper limit of four is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform arrival notification while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the promotion lamp notification and stops all reels. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform arrival notification while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

Next, the process for realizing the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowchart. In the present embodiment, the main board 31 has the timer interrupt process and the special symbol process process in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9, and the effect control board 80 has the effect control main process and the effect control process process of FIG. The same process as is performed. Hereinafter, among the processes performed in the present embodiment, such as the special symbol stop process, the processes different from the above-mentioned processes will be described with reference to the flowchart.

FIG. 34-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the present embodiment.

In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and ends the variable display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and the data indicating "second" is stored in the special symbol pointer. If it is set, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, if the jackpot flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

When the big hit flag is set, such as when it is decided to make a big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction or a big hit without a symbol 5R time reduction, the CPU 56 is a flag set when the time reduction state is controlled. When the flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and when the special state flag is set, the special state flag is reset (68SH001), and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines. A process for transmitting either a big hit start 1 designated command or a big hit start 2 designated command (big hit start designated command) is performed according to the type of the big hit (S135).

As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot, the jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is symbol 5R with a short time and is a jackpot, the jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S136). After that, in the large winning opening pre-opening process, the large winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening is opened and the round is started.

Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times) is referred to with reference to the opening pattern data for each type of jackpot stored in the ROM 54 described above according to the type of jackpot specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55. ), Opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and the like, data indicating an opening mode is set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S138), and the process is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the pre-opening process for the large winning opening.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133 described above, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit opening control timer used for the small hit opening control by referring to the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 (for example,). (5 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 second), and data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time between openings are set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is due to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state is set (S142). When the time saving flag is not set in S142, the time saving state is not set, and the process proceeds to 68SHS005 described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, it is in the time saving state, so that the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state is counted. The total time reduction counter as a counting means is updated by -1 subtraction (S143).

The total time reduction counter that is subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the 5R symbol time reduction and the big hit in the big hit end process of FIG. When it is controlled to the second time reduction state after the big hit of the type other than the big hit without the symbol time reduction, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, the fluctuation display which is the loss display result is subtracted and updated every time it is executed. .. The total time reduction counter is used to determine both whether or not the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied and whether or not the end condition of the second time reduction state is satisfied.

Next, based on confirming whether or not the special symbol pointer is the data indicating the "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end of the variation display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end of the variation display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 time reduction counter, which is subtracted and updated in S146, is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state after the end of the big hit game. In the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time reduction state, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time reduction state. Will be done. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 every time the variation display which is the result of the second special symbol being removed is executed once.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter becomes "0", one of the end conditions of the first time reduction state is satisfied, or one of the end conditions of the second time reduction state is satisfied. Since it is a time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state that is being executed. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "0", it is for confirming whether or not the other end condition of the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied. Then proceed to S148.

In S148, in order to confirm whether or not the end condition of the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state being executed is satisfied based on the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time-saving state. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter that has been subtracted and updated in S143 has become "0" (S148). If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S152, which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time reduction counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

In S149 and S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol has become the number of times of the end condition, and by S148, the first special symbol and the first special symbol and It is executed to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed when it is determined that the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has reached the number of times of the end condition. ..

In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set time reduction counter is reset (S150). Then, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed according to the end of the time saving condition based on the number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state (S151).

The 68SHS003 further performs a process for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS002). Then, the special normal flag indicating that the special normal state is set is set (68SH003), 30 is set in the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state (68SH004), and the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S152), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

When the time saving flag is not set in S142 described above, it is not the time saving state, so it is confirmed whether or not it is the special normal state (68SH005). If the 68SH005 is not in the special normal state, the process proceeds to S152. When the special normal state is set in 68SH005, the special state counter is updated by -1 subtraction (68SH006). In 68SH007, it is confirmed whether or not the special normal counter is 0 (68SH007). If the special normal counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S152. When the special normal counter is 0, a process for transmitting a special normal state end command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS008), and the process proceeds to S152.

In such a special symbol stop process, according to S142 to S151, in the first time saving state, the execution of one deviation variation display of the second special symbol and the total of 5 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When any of the execution of the out-of-times variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, according to S142 to S151, when the second time is shortened, the second special symbol is executed 7 times and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed 11 times in total. When any of the above is satisfied, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

FIG. 34-16 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in the present embodiment. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer set before the jackpot end process is executed (68SHS101). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (68SHS102). If it has not passed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed, in the current jackpot game state, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot to be terminated is a 5R time-saving jackpot based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55. (68SHS103).

When the type of the jackpot to be terminated is a jackpot with no time reduction of 5R, a process for transmitting a special normal state specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS104). Then, a special normal flag indicating that the special normal state is set is set (68SHS105), 30 is set in the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state (68SHS106), and the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

In the 68SHS107, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (68SHS107) according to the end of the big hit game state, and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

If the type of jackpot ending by 68SHS103 is not a jackpot with no symbol 5R time reduction, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot ending with symbol 5R time reduction is a jackpot (S163). When the type of jackpot to end is symbol 5R with time reduction and jackpot, in order to control to the first time reduction state, as the end condition of the first time reduction state, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to "1" (second special symbol). (S164), and set the data of "5" (corresponding to the total fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol 5 times) in the total time reduction counter (S165). .. Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

When the type of jackpot ending by S163 is not a jackpot with symbol 5R time reduction, the type of jackpot ending is a jackpot type other than the jackpot with symbol 5R time reduction and the jackpot without symbol 5R time reduction, and is controlled to the second time reduction state. In order to do so, as the end condition of the second time reduction state, the data of "7" (corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol once) is set in the special figure 2 time reduction counter (S167), and the total time reduction counter is set to "7". 11 ”(corresponding to the total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 times) is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

In S170, a time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

As a result, it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state with the symbol 5R time reduction, and is controlled to the second time reduction state after the end of the big hit type big hit game state other than the symbol 5R time reduction jackpot and the symbol 5R time reduction no jackpot. Will be done. The end conditions for each of the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are individually defined by the number of variable display of only the second special symbol and the total number of variable display opening of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. To.

In such a big hit end process, by S164 and S165, after the big hit game state with a symbol 5R time reduction is completed, the second special symbol is executed once and the first special symbol and the second special are displayed. The setting is made to control to the first time saving state until any one of the execution of the deviation variation display of the symbol a total of 5 times is satisfied. In addition, according to S167 and S168, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the big hit of the symbol 5R time reduction and the big hit without the symbol 5R time reduction, the second special symbol is executed seven times, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the first special symbol are executed. The setting is made to control to the second time saving state until any one of the execution of the out-of-order fluctuation display of the 2 special symbols is established 11 times in total.

Next, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, a process of transmitting control information (operation port opening command) indicating that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 34-17 is a flowchart showing the processing during the first time reduction in which the operation port opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. The process during the first time-saving change in FIG. 34-17 is included in the special symbol change process (S303 in FIG. 10).

In the process during the first variation of the time reduction, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is the operation port opening timing that opens the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS201). When the operation port opening timing is reached, the operation port opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS202), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS203), and the process is terminated.

When it is not the operation opening opening timing in the 68SHS201, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the operation opening closing timing is such that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed (68SHS204). When the operating port closing timing is reached, the operating port closing command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS205), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS206), and the process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is shown that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and when it is controlled to the open state, it is controlled to the open state. The control information is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 34-17 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S310) in the present embodiment. In the small hit end post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning validity period timer by -1 subtraction (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is used to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. Determines whether or not is in the ON state (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that the V prize is detected during the V prize valid period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting the V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V prize has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has been completed. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, the opening / closing member is opened to control the V winning region 870 (V winning opening) to return to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hit game state, if a right-handed hit is made according to the right-handed promotion notification described later, the game ball is allowed to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. The game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 always wins the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the jackpot flag is set in S449, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Next, the CPU 56 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer according to the fact that it is determined that the data will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. Formally memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is reset once (S451), and the special normal flag is reset (68SH304).

Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command or a jackpot start 4 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Further, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the opening count (for example, 10 times or 5 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time (round) are referred to according to the jackpot type. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as a large winning opening closing time) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S455), and the process is terminated. As a result, when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big hit game state does not occur. Therefore, in S81, the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer is deleted (S456), and the special normal state specification command is used. Is processed to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS301). Then, a special normal flag indicating that the special normal state is set is set (68SHS302), 30 is set in the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state (68SHS303), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value is updated to correspond to the normal process (S300) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

Next, the processing on the effect control microcomputer 100 side will be described. FIG. 34-19 is a flowchart showing the time saving time variation processing. The time saving time variation processing of FIG. 34-19 is included in the effect symbol variation processing (S802 of FIG. 19). Further, the time saving time variation processing shows the processing during the variable display of the first second special symbol after the big hit with the time saving.

In the time-saving time variation processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the fourth hold has won the start (68SHS401). This can be confirmed by the second hold storage number specification command. When the 4th hold wins the start prize, the rotation of the temporarily stopped middle reel is started (68SHS402). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining time is equal to or less than the specific time (68SHS403). When the remaining time is less than or equal to the specified time, the process proceeds to 68SHS405. When the remaining time is not less than the specified time, the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped (68SHS404).

The effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not there is a hold sequence (68SHS405). Whether or not there is a pending ream can be confirmed by the command C2XX. When there is a hold ream, "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 27, and the process ends. When there is no hold sequence, "arrival" is output from the speaker 27, and the process ends.

In the 68SHS401, when the fourth hold has not won the start prize, it is confirmed whether or not the specific period has passed (68SHS408). When the specific period has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (68SHS409). When the number of reserved lamps is less than 4, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned off (68SHS410), and the process is terminated.

In the 68SHS408, when the specific period has not elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation port opening command has been received (68SHS411). If the operation port opening command has not been received, the process ends as it is. When the operation port opening command is received, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (68SHS412). If the number of pending items is not less than 4, the process ends. When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, voice notification is performed (68SHS413) and the process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state by receiving the operation port opening command. According to such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 can surely perform the notification by the operation port opening command transmitted from the CPU 56 that controls the variable winning device.

[Main effects on feature 069SH]

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state.
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result.
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. Reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes notification (output of "arrival", etc.), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1).
After the end of the advantageous state, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 11 times, etc.) equal to or greater than the upper limit number, the advantageous state (via small hit 11 (10) R time reduction, large hit, and via small hit 6) (5) When controlled to (5) R time reduction and big hit, etc.), it is possible to control to a special state (chance time B, etc.) after the end of the advantageous state.

(3) Means 1 The gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The promotion notification means executes promotion notification by temporarily stopping identification information (promotion notification symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
With other winning devices (first starting winning opening 13, etc.) that can start variable display in the variable display device by winning a prize in the game medium,
Among the variable displays that can be started by winning the game medium in the other winning device, other holding storage means (first holding storage buffer, etc.) that stores the holding information for the variable display that has not been started yet. When,
The execution time (2000 ms, etc.) of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the other hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state is based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state. It is shorter than the execution time (60,000 ms, etc.) of the variable display to be executed.
The promotion notification means is another promotion notification (“right-handed”) different from the promotion notification during execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the other hold storage means after the end of the advantageous state. Output etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute other promotion notifications according to a short variable display time.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
The predetermined period is a period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state.

(6) The gaming machine according to (5).
When it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information first executed after the advantageous state (when the holding sequence is determined), the arrival notification means is the arrival notification. Notify in a specific mode different from the notification mode (output "Congratulations", etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state according to a specific aspect. You can enhance the feeling.

(7) The gaming machine according to (5).
The arrival notification means executes arrival notification by temporarily stopping the identification information (arrival notification symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

Regarding the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on a variable display result of a special symbol or an effect symbol, and a variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area. Combined with a gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on a gaming ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning slot (V winning slot) in (so-called character). Although the gaming machine (so-called one-kind two-kind mixer) has been described, it may be applied to the first-class gaming machine.

Specifically, since the first-class gaming machine has a hold, by applying the feature unit 068SH, when the number of the stored hold information is the first number (0 to 3), By making the notification mode different from that of the second number (4 pieces), which is larger than the first number, and applying the feature unit 069SH, the number of reserved information stored in the predetermined period is the second number. When the upper limit of the hold information (4 pieces) that can be stored in the hold storage buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved information is set to 4 each, but other numbers such as 8 may be used.

In the present embodiment, a voice such as "arrival" is output as the arrival notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrival notification may be a minute sound output when the game control board sends a command and the effect control board receives the command.

In the present embodiment, the reel is used as the first movable body and the second movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first movable body and the second movable body may be an accessory. As the accessory of the first movable body, for example, the accessory that appears when the period shifts to a predetermined period may be used, and as the accessory of the second movable body, for example, the accessory that appears when the second number is reached. May be used. In any case, by notifying using a movable body, the variation of the notification can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the present embodiment, 1 minute is used as the predetermined period, 30 seconds is used as the specific period, and 15 seconds is used as the specific time, but the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined period, the specific period, and the specific time may be appropriately set for each model (for example, the number of times and the time when the variable winning device is opened).

In the present embodiment, the variable display device is a drum type using a reel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display device using a liquid crystal display, an organic EL, project mapping, or the like may be used.

In this embodiment, an embodiment in which a prize is urged to a variable winning ball device 15 or an arrival notification is performed has been described, but a closed state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, and a closed state in which the game medium wins a prize The variable winning device that can be easily changed to an open state is not limited to the winning ball device that can always win a prize, such as the first starting winning opening 13. In this case, the notifying means may be used as a notifying means for notifying the winning device of the winning device, instead of the notifying means for notifying that the variable winning device is in the open state when the variable winning device is in the open state. good. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player to urge the player to win a prize, and the player can recognize that the winning ball device should be clearly aimed at by the notification, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. This can be prevented and the player can be prevented from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

In the present embodiment, the notification mode is different between the case of the first number and the case of the second number larger than the first number, but the notification mode is different depending on the number of reserved pieces (for example, stepwise). You may do so. That is, the notification mode when the number of holdings is 1, the notification mode when the number of holdings is 2, the notification mode when the number of holdings is 3, and the notification mode when the number of holdings is 4 may be different from each other. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do.

In the present embodiment, the notification mode is different depending on the combination of voice, lamp, and reel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lamp, the voice, and the reel may have different notification modes, such as changing the color of the lamp, changing the voice, or changing the movement of the reel. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do. Further, the remaining time in a predetermined period may be displayed digitally or by a bar.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to correspond to a gaming machine having diversified specifications and gaming methods, the player can perform only right-handed or left-handed notification, which has been performed in conventional gaming machines. It is possible to solve the problem that it is difficult to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage or to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. This not only makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevents the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period, but also only the player who has been playing the game conventionally. Instead, even beginners can easily enjoy the game, which has the effect of promoting an increase in the playing population.

[Main effects on featured parts 244F and 245F]
(1) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. Since it is possible to control the display so that the remaining number of times is not displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. Since it is possible to control the display without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

(3) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to (E), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. By erasing the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the erased remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to control the display so as not to display the remaining number of times. As a result, it is suggested that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated by erasing and redisplaying the display of the remaining number of times. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. By changing the color of the remaining number of time reduction images 96, it is possible to produce an effect suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

(5) As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 96, The remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time-saving state is determined by performing display control such as the lock image 96A that superimposes and displays a predetermined image suggesting that the remaining number of times is not updated on the time-saving remaining number image 96. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

(6) In the time saving state, (B) to (G) in FIG. 33-1, S927 and S928 in FIG. 33-2 (B), (B) to (G) in FIG. 33-3, and FIG. 33-4. As shown in S927, S928, etc. of (B), when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining. The number of remaining times of the second special figure is displayed as the number of times. Then, in the time-saving state, (H) in FIG. 33-1, S927, S929 in FIG. 33-2 (B), (H) in FIG. 33-2, S927, S929 in FIG. 33-4 (B), etc. As shown, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. , The remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

(7) As shown in [1st display control restriction example], the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the first until the second condition is satisfied. When the number of remaining times is less than two, even if the first variable display is executed, the display control is restricted so as not to display the remaining number of times, so that it depends on the gaming state. Since the remaining number of times is displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) As shown in [Specific notification example] shown in FIG. 33-6, the first variable notification is performed based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display in the time saving state becomes the specific number or more. In a game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times of the variable display and the second variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state by the specific notification.

(9) By executing the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and the like, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect is executed according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the production mode of the specific production, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by the fun of the production.

[Main modification examples of the feature portions 244F and 245F]
(1) Regarding the first display control example described above, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number is not displayed. As an example of display control to be performed, (a) display control for changing the time-reduced remaining number image 96 to another image such as a character image so as not to display the time-reduced remaining number, or (b). Other display controls such as display control may be performed so that the time saving remaining number is not displayed by concealing the time saving remaining number image 96 so as to cover it with another image such as a character image.

(2) Regarding the above-mentioned second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is not updated. As an example of display control, (a) the display of the remaining time reduction is updated by redisplaying the image 96 of the remaining time reduction that has not been updated by changing the image 96 to another image such as a character image. No display control, (b) Display control that does not update the display of the remaining time reduction as a result by returning to the original display by trying to subtract and update the image 96 of the remaining time reduction, (c) Image of the remaining time reduction image 96 Display control that suggests not updating by changing the size (for example, changing to an extremely small image) and does not update, or (d) Message that the time saving remaining number is not updated in the vicinity of the image of the time saving remaining number image 96. Other display controls such as display control that does not update by suggesting that the image is not updated may be performed by displaying.

(3) Regarding the above-mentioned first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is deleted. As a control, (a) the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied is the second until the second condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the variable display is exceeded, the display of the remaining number of times of time reduction is deleted, and the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second condition of the end of the time reduction state. When the number of remaining times of the second variable display until is satisfied is less than the control so as not to erase the display of the remaining number of times of time reduction, or (b) the first variable display until the first condition of ending the time saving state is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the second variable display exceeds the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied, the first variable display and the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied. 2 When the remaining number of times of the total number of variable displays is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied, the control to erase the display of the remaining number of times of time saving is executed. You may.

(4) In the first display control and the second display control, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is until the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the second variable display is exceeded, the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time saving state, and at least the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied is displayed. And when the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the display control for displaying the remaining number of times of the total number of times as the remaining number of times. May control the display as follows. When the remaining number of total times exceeds the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining number of times of the total number is less than the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the display mode of the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be different. In that case, different display modes include different display positions, different display colors, different display sizes, and different display shapes (fonts, etc.), which are currently displayed. Is included.

(5) As the above-mentioned specific notification example, the following control may be executed in addition to the above-mentioned control, or may be executed together with the above-mentioned control. Based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display to be executed exceeds a specific number of times in the time saving state, a special image such as a special character image is displayed to notify the player that the situation is disadvantageous. (Suggest) Control. An image of a wide display area larger than a predetermined range of the display area of the effect display device 9, such as changing the background image based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed in the time saving state becomes a specific number or more. By changing the above, control is performed to notify (suggest) that the situation will be disadvantageous to the player. Control to notify by directly displaying a message indicating that the situation is disadvantageous to the player based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed becomes a specific number or more in the time saving state. do.

(6) For the time-saving remaining number image 96, an image that can specify whether the "total remaining number" is displayed or the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed is displayed as follows. May be good. (A) Time-saving remaining number of times For the image 96, the image color may be different between when the "total remaining number of times" is displayed and when the "second special figure remaining number of times" is displayed. (B) Time saving remaining number For the image 96, the size of the image may be different depending on whether the "total remaining number" is displayed or the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. .. (C) Time saving remaining number For the image 96, the shape of the image (character font, character) is displayed when the "total remaining number" is displayed and when the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. The thickness of the characters, the color of the characters, etc.) may be different. (D) Time saving remaining number For the image 96, a message indicating which of "total remaining number" and "second special figure remaining number" is displayed may be directly displayed.

(7) With respect to the time-saving remaining number image 96, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second until the second condition is satisfied. In addition to when the remaining number of times of the variable display is exceeded, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is until the second condition is satisfied. Even when the number of remaining times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display, the remaining number of times of the second special figure may be displayed as the remaining number of time reductions.

(8) Remaining number of time reductions For the image 96, the total number of remaining times, which is the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied, and the second until the second condition is satisfied. Both the second special figure remaining number, which is the number of variable displays, may be displayed in parallel.

(9) Regarding the [specific notification example], a predetermined specific number of times such as 4 times is set in the time saving state, and the specific notification is executed when the first variable display of the specific number of times is executed. An example is shown. However, the specific number of times set as the execution condition of the specific notification is not limited to this, and the number of reserved storages (0 to 4) 9 of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state is set, and the number of reserved storages is set. After the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the specific notification may be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is further executed.

(10) In the first display control and the second display control described above, an example is shown in which the display of the remaining number of time reductions can be updated at the end of the variable display in the time reduction state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time saving state, control may be performed so that the display of the remaining time saving number can be updated at the start of the variable display.

[Other means configuration example 1]
The above-described embodiment includes the following means configuration.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit game state opened by the big hit variable winning ball device 20) by performing a variable display (variable display of a special symbol, an effect symbol, etc.). Machine 1 etc.)
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing information related to variable display as hold storage information, and
Specific effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S881 to S896 in FIG. 31, S901 to S906 in FIG. 32, etc.) capable of executing the specific effect (specific effect in FIG. 29, etc.) and
A change effect execution means (micro for effect control) capable of executing a change effect (such as the first change effect on hold to the fourth change effect on hold in FIGS. 29 (D) to (G)) for changing the effect mode of the specific effect. It is equipped with a computer 100, FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31, etc.).
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect according to the variation display being executed in the specific variation pattern (such as the variation pattern of the second special symbol for the first time after the end of the symbol 4R time saving big hit game state). (S881 etc. in FIGS. 30 and 31),
The change effect execution means executes the change effect according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed (FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31 and the like).

According to such a configuration, the fun of the game can be improved by the fun of the production.
(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the variation display is executed in the specific variation pattern, the promotion effect of promoting the storage of the pending storage information in the reserved storage means (winning of "Save the hold!" In FIGS. 29 (B) to (G)! Further equipped with a promotion effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S886, etc. in FIG. 31) for executing a prize promotion effect (etc.) for displaying the promotion image 9B.
The change effect execution means executes the change effect in relation to an increase in the number of reserved storage information (FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31 and the like).

According to such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize the relationship between the change effect and the number of reserved storage information.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the change effect is executed, the change effect execution means produces an effect of increasing the number of reach lines that increases the number of lines in the reach mode formed in connection with the execution of the specific effect (FIGS. 29 (D) to FIG. As in (G), the reach line increase effect of increasing the number of reach lines by the look-ahead effect symbol 94 according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to visually understand the relationship between the change effect and the number of reserved storage information.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The change effect executing means increases the number of lines in the same reach mode in the effect of increasing the number of reach lines (as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), the same “7” as the number of reserved stored information increases. Increase the number of reach lines for the design, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the effect control.
(5) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
During the reach line increase effect, the display result of the reach line symbol corresponding to each of the reserved storage information of FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J) suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is obtained is displayed. Further equipped with a suggestion effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S893 in FIG. 31, etc.) for executing a suggestion effect (such as a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not to be on hold).
The suggestion effect is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of lines in the reach mode (suggestion effect period in FIG. 30, S893 to S895 in FIG. 31, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the effect control.
(6) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The promotion effect executing means ends the promotion effect when the number of reserved storage information reaches a predetermined value (FIGS. 29 (G), (H), S890, S891, etc. in FIG. 31).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect by suppressing the promotion effect more than necessary.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved storage information by an effect using a series of images (such as the effect of the determination effect moving images of FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O)). (FIGS. 29 (A) to (O), 883 in FIG. 31, S906 in FIG. 32, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a series of images.

[Other means configuration example 2]
The above-described embodiment further includes the following means configuration.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations.
Variable winning means that allows the game medium to enter in a predetermined state (V-judgment winning device 87, etc.),
A specific area (V winning area 870, etc.) provided in the variable winning means and into which the game medium can enter, and
The first state control means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S305 to S307, etc. in FIG. 10) that controls an advantageous state (symbol jackpot, etc.) based on the variation display result, and
Based on the variation display result, the game medium is controlled to the predetermined state so that the game medium can enter the specific area in the variable winning means (V winning, etc.) (small hit state, etc.), and the specific state is specified in the predetermined state. A second state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) that controls the advantageous state (big hit via small hit, etc.) based on the entry of the game medium into the region. Etc.) and
A predetermined effect means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (such as an effect of displaying the V winning aura image 95 as a round number suggestion effect in FIG. 20) based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area in the predetermined state. A microcomputer 100 for use, S842 to S844 in FIG. 26, etc.)
In the predetermined state, a predetermined period (such as a period of repeating opening and closing for 0.1 second × 10 times and closing for 1 second) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (10 or the like) of gaming media are used in the variable winning means. Finished based on the entry,
The predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of the game media that have entered the variable winning means after the game medium has entered the specific area (small hit as shown in FIG. 24). The color of the V winning aura image 95 changes in the round number suggestion effect of FIG. 20 according to the number of winnings (1 to 10 or the like) to the V determination winning device 87 during the game state).

According to such a configuration, after the game medium has entered the specific area, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed according to the number of the game media that have entered the variable winning means, so that the effect of the game is improved. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the game medium enters the specific area in the predetermined state, the approach notification effect means (small) for executing the approach notification effect (V winning notification, etc. in FIG. 20) for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area. Further, a process of displaying the V winning image 94 of FIG. 20 in the process of opening S808 of FIG. 19 in the hit effect) is further provided.
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect in relation to the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIG. 20, when the V prize image 94 is displayed, the V prize aura image 95 is displayed, etc.). ).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined effect is executed in connection with the execution of the approach notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area, the effect further improves the interest of the game. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (as shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E) and FIG. 23 (A), V. The color of the winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow according to the number of winnings in the V determination winning device 87).

According to such a configuration, since the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the game that has entered the variable winning means The number of media can draw the player's attention.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The advantageous state is selected from a plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages (multiple types of hit types in FIG. 2, etc.).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state (FIG. 23 (B)). As described above, the selection ratio of a plurality of types of effect patterns having different stepwise change patterns of the color of the V winning aura image 95 differs depending on the determined number of jackpot rounds, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state. By making it possible for the player to recognize the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the production.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing information related to variable display as hold storage information, and
Further provided with a look-ahead determination means (game control microcomputer 560, S1215, S1225, etc. in FIG. 11) for determining whether or not the variation display that has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state.
The predetermined effect means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode based on the reservation storage information including the hold storage information in the advantageous state ([V winning image aura color). Modification example of producing a pending continuous notification effect] etc.).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed to a specific mode based on the fact that the hold storage means includes the hold storage information that is in an advantageous state, so that the hold storage means is in an advantageous state. By making it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved storage information is included, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the production.

Next, other effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) By executing the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and the like, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect is executed according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the production mode of the specific production, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by the fun of the production.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), a change in a specific effect is caused by executing a change effect in connection with an increase in the number of reserved storage information due to the winning promotion effect. It is possible to make the player clearly recognizable the relationship between the effect and the number of reserved stored information.

(3) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, a reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with an increase in the number of second reserved storage information is executed. As a result, the relationship between the change effect and the number of second reserved storage information can be visually understood.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, the reach mode is increased by increasing the number of reach lines of the same "7" symbol according to the increase in the number of reserved storage information. It is possible to facilitate the development and design of the production control, for example, it is not necessary to consider the production pattern regarding the expectation level that is advantageous to the player, such as different expectations that are advantageous to the player depending on the type of. ..

(5) As shown in FIG. 30, by allowing the suggested effect period to be executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of reach lines, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the effect control.

(6) As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and 29 (H), the winning promotion effect is promoted more than necessary by ending when the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4). By suppressing the production, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being lowered due to the production.

(7) As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), by executing a specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a determination effect moving image. The entertainment of the game can be improved by the production.

(8) By executing the round number suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V winning aura image 95 is performed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 after the game medium has entered the specific area. Since the effect mode of the predetermined effect such as the effect of displaying the game can be changed, the game can be improved by the effect without delaying the progress of the game.

(9) As shown in FIG. 20, the round number suggestion effect by the V-winning aura image 95 is executed in connection with the effect of notifying the V-winning by displaying the V-winning image 94. The fun of the game can be further improved.

(10) As shown in FIG. 20, since the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87. , The number of rounds suggestion effect and the number of game balls that have entered the V-determination winning device 87 can be noticed by the player.

(11) As shown in FIG. 23, the number of rounds (rounds) in the big hit game state in which the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 is controlled based on the V prize in the small hit game state. Since it can be changed step by step according to the advantage of the number), the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, so that the interest of the game can be further improved by the production.

(12) As shown in [Modification example of performing the hold continuous notification effect by the V winning image aura color], if the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the hold storage information that becomes a symbol big hit and the small hit in the hold storage information. Since the effect mode of the effect of displaying the aura image can be changed to a specific mode based on the inclusion of at least one of the hold memory information, the hold memory removal method is via a symbol jackpot or a small hit. By making it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory information that is the big hit of the game is included, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

(13) As shown in FIG. 21, at least one of the reserved storage information determined to be a symbol big hit or the reserved storage information determined to be a small hit when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state. Since the hold continuous notification effect can be executed based on the fact that one of them is included, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect.

(14) As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a plurality of totals of the reserved storage information determined to be a symbol big hit and the reserved storage information determined to be a small hit are stored, the hold notification effect is generated. Since it is executed, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of hold memory information that can be a big hit, so that the effect can further improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

(15) As shown in FIG. 21, a blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hit game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to suitably execute the hold continuous notification effect for the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

(16) In the hold continuous notification effect, for example, "+3BONUS" in FIG. 21C and "+4BONUS" in FIG. 21D, the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information. When the number is less than a predetermined number (3 pieces, etc.) and when the number is more than a predetermined number (4 pieces, etc.), the effect mode of the special effect is different, so that the hold continuous notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes. Crab players can be noticed.

(17) As shown in FIG. 24, hold according to the number of hold storage information that can be a big hit, which is an advantageous number of rounds for the player, such as a symbol 15R time-saving big hit and via a small hit 16 (15) R time-saving big hit. Since the ratio of executing the continuous notification effect is different, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to how many times the jackpot, which is an advantageous number of rounds, is executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

(18) In the hold continuous notification effect determination table, when the total number of hold stations for the symbol 15R time-saving big hit and the small hit via 16 (15) R time-saving big hit is 2 or more among the big hit types, the hold continuous notification effect The data is set to run. As a result, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can store a plurality of hold storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous for the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types. By making it recognizable, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

(19) As shown in FIG. 21, the hold sequence is based on the fact that at least one of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol big hit or the hold storage information determined to be a small hit is included. Since the notification effect can be executed, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the effect.

(20) As shown in FIG. 21, the number of the reserved storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the number of the reserved stored information determined to be the small hit are identifiable in the reserved continuous notification effect, so that the player can be notified. By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of reserved stored information that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

(21) When a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the V prize notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production when a prize is generated.

(22) As shown in [Variation example of change in the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect], there are a plurality of cases where the total number of hold storage information which is a symbol big hit and the hold storage information which is a big hit is a plurality, and when there is a small hit. When the effect mode of the hold sequence notification effect is different depending on the case where there are only a plurality of hold memory information that are big hits, it is possible to change the effect mode of the hold sequence notification effect to be executed according to the hold sequence type. , It is possible to draw the player's attention to which effect mode the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

(23) As shown in [Variation example of change in the effect mode of the hold sequence notification effect], the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first hold sequence type to the third hold sequence type. Can draw the player's attention to which effect mode the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

(24) As shown in [Modification example of limiting control of hold continuous notification effect], after executing the hold continuous notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of hold stations, the hold that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect By prohibiting the execution of the hold continuous notification effect until all the stored information is exhausted, it is restricted from newly executing the hold continuous notification effect. You can clarify which one.

[Other variants]
Next, other modification examples and feature points are listed below.

(1) In the above-described embodiment, various selection decisions by lottery for executing the effect pattern of the round number suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the change of the variation display which is the small hit, and the small hit gaming state. You may execute it when it becomes.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, as an effect suggesting the number of rounds, an example is shown in which the effect mode of the V winning aura image 95 is changed for each entry of the game ball according to a predetermined effect pattern. However, not limited to this, it is determined by lottery whether or not to change the effect mode (for example, color) of the V winning aura image 95 for each entry detection of the game ball, and based on the lottery result, the V winning aura image The production mode of 95 may be changed. In that case, the determination of whether or not to change the color and the selection determination of the color to be changed may be executed for each entry detection of the game ball, and the color change is always made for each entry detection of the game ball. However, the selection of the color to be changed may be determined.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which when the V-winning aura image 95 becomes rainbow-colored in the round number suggestion effect, it is confirmed that the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V winning aura image 95 may be produced in rainbow colors when the 16 (15) R time saving jackpot and the holding storage information to be the holding sequence exist. Further, when the 5 (4) R time saving jackpot and the holding storage information to be a holding sequence exist, the V winning aura image 95 may be produced to be rainbow-colored.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which an effect in which the color of the V winning aura image 95 can be changed is executed in the round number suggestion effect as a predetermined effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the round number suggestion effect, an effect in which the V winning image 94 changes from a “v” character to a “W” character may be executed. In that case, the color of the V winning aura image 95 may be changed in the same manner as described above.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state described as the advantageous state is typically an example of the jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened a plurality of times.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, as a round suggestion effect, an effect of changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 accompanying the V-winning image 94 is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V-winning image 94 is not limited to this. A V-winning aura image may be displayed as a non-accompanying image (for example, an aura-shaped effect image may be displayed at a position away from the V-winning image 94), and the color may be changed. Further, whether or not to execute the effect of changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 accompanying the V-winning image 94 is determined by a predetermined lottery, and may not be executed. ..

(7) In the above-described embodiment, as the hold ream notification, an example is shown in which the total of the number of hold reams of the symbol big hit and the number of reservation reams due to the small hit can be specified, such as "+3 BONUS". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be such that the number of reserved stations for the symbol big hit and the number of reserved stations for the small hit can be individually specified.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, as an effect pattern when executing the round number suggestion effect, the effect data when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10 is not provided. However, it is also possible to provide effect data when the number of game balls entering the V-determination winning device 87 exceeds 10. For example, if the number of game balls entering the V-determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, the color may be the same as the 10th color. By doing so, even when the number of game balls entering the V-determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, the round number suggestion effect can be executed without causing a sense of discomfort.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the contents of the second reserved storage information existing when the big hit gaming state occurs are pre-read, and the reserved storage information that becomes the “symbol big hit” and the reserved storage information that becomes the “small hit”. An example of executing the hold continuous notification effect when there is any of the above is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is hold storage information that is a “small hit”. The hold continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is hold storage information that is a “symbol jackpot”.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, there is a case where there is a hold storage information that becomes a "symbol big hit" and a hold storage information that becomes a "small hit" in the second hold storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs. An example of executing a hold continuous notification effect of the same effect mode is shown for each of the cases where there is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect of different production modes may be executed depending on whether there is a hold storage information that is a “symbol big hit” or a hold storage information that is a “small hit”.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the same is true regardless of the total number of "symbol big hits" and "small hits" in the second reserved storage information existing when the big hit gaming state occurs. The hold continuous notification effect of the effect mode may be executed, or the hold continuous notification effect of different effect modes may be executed according to the total number.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, there are cases where there is only a "design big hit", cases where there is only a "small hit", and cases where there is only a "small hit" in the second reserved storage information that exists when the big hit gaming state occurs, and there is a "design big hit". And when there are both small hits ”, the hold continuous notification effect of the same effect mode may be executed, and depending on these cases, the hold continuous notification effect of different types of effect modes may be executed.

(13) The look-ahead of the second hold storage information for executing the hold continuous notification effect may be executed at the start of the variable display that becomes a small hit or a big hit, or may be executed during the small hit gaming state. It may be executed during the jackpot game state.

(14) The V-lamp effect executed as the above-mentioned hold sequence notification effect may not be an effect capable of notifying the number of hold stations, or may be an effect capable of notifying the number of hold stations. When the number of reserved stations is to be notified, the relationship between the number of reserved stations and the emission color of the lamp is determined in advance in the V lamp effect, and the number of reserved stations is determined by the lamp emission color based on the relationship. It may be possible to notify.

(15) Regarding "big hit via small hit", instead of selecting and determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a small hit, when a V prize occurs, multiple control patterns such as the number of rounds of the big hit are set. You may choose from different types of control patterns.

(16) The arrangement of the structures such as the variable winning ball device 15, the V determination winning device 87, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 shown in the above-described embodiment is an example, and different arrangements are made as follows. It may be adopted. For example, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be provided in the right game area. Further, a V winning area is provided inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 combines a variable winning ball device for big hits and a variable winning ball device for small hits into one variable winning ball. It may be used in combination with the device.

(17) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball wins in the V winning area of the V determination winning device 87, a big hit gaming state is set and only the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Not limited to this, the V determination winning device 87 may also be opened in a predetermined opening mode in the jackpot gaming state, or only the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode. ..

(18) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the V determination winning device 87 is always opened when the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Not limited to this, when a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is determined based on a specific lottery whether or not to open the game ball, and the lottery result is set to the open state. When it becomes, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state when the game ball wins in the V winning area in the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. By controlling the jackpot gaming state in which the same operation as in the gaming state is executed, the operation in such a gaming state may be executed. For example, it is possible to execute a jackpot game control of an opening pattern such that the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the first round and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. When it is determined by the jackpot determination to execute such a jackpot game control, such a jackpot gaming state is started, and the V determination winning device 87 is opened as the control of the first round of the jackpot gaming state. By making it appear as a small hit game state, when the game ball wins a V in the V winning area 870 in the first round, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened by continuing the big hit gaming state in the second round. The subsequent round control is executed to make it appear as a big hit game state. On the other hand, in the first round of the jackpot gaming state, when the game ball does not win the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87, the jackpot gaming state is not continued after the second round, but in the first round. Execute control to terminate.

(20) The advantageous states advantageous to the player may include various advantageous states such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a high base state. In a gaming machine in which the jackpot determination probability can be controlled from a low probability state to a high probability state (probability change state), the high probability state is also included in the advantageous state. In this embodiment, as a more specific advantageous state, it corresponds to opening the big hit variable winning ball device 20 in the big hit gaming state.

(21) The specific effect is to increase the number of reach lines (may be a decrease display) according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved storage information), but the following effect is performed. May be. For example, a predetermined icon image (for example, a star-shaped image showing a character reminiscent of a player's advantageous state, "RUSH") corresponding to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved storage information). The number may be increased (or decreased). In addition, the number of predetermined character images (for example, special character images that are not displayed in other effects) is increased (or decreased) according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the second reserved storage information). There may be. Further, a numerical image counting down from the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information may be displayed according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved storage information), and the current second reserved storage information may be displayed. A numerical image that counts up from the number of information (for example, 0, etc.) to the upper limit value (4) may be displayed. As described above, the specific effect may be any form of effect.

(22) As the change effect, any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information. For example, any effect may be used as long as the change of the effect mode in the various effects described above is executed according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information.

(23) The change effect is to change the effect mode in which the number of reach lines is increased according to the number of second reserved storage information, but the reach symbol is a reach symbol using a symbol other than the “7” symbol. There may be. As such a reach symbol, a special symbol other than the symbol included in the symbol string used for the normal variable display, for example, a symbol having a character reminiscent of a state advantageous to the player, such as "RUSH", is special. A design may be used.

(24) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine that pays the gaming medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the winning is described, but the gaming medium is enclosed and the gaming medium is used by the player according to the occurrence of the winning. An enclosed gaming machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out to the player may be adopted. The enclosed gaming machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of gaming balls, which is an example of a gaming medium, in the gaming machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize. The game machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a prize has been explained, but the game medium is enclosed and the game point (the game point) without paying the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed gaming machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of gaming balls, which is an example of a gaming medium, in the gaming machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

(25) In the present embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value in the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value containing 0%, a value containing 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

(26) The game state advantageous to the player is a state in which the big hit game state, the time saving state, the high base state, and the game state after the big hit game are determined to be a big hit as compared with the normal state. Any gaming state may be used as long as it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, such as a probabilistic state.

(27) In the above-mentioned operation effect, as the detection means capable of detecting the operation (operation) of the player, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 capable of detecting the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player such as the stick controller 122. Such a detection means is shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player, another detection means such as the push sensor 124 capable of detecting the operation of the push button 120 may be used to detect the operation of the operation means. A detection means that can directly detect the movement of the player, such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor, may be used instead of the means for the detection.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state, and variable display of identification information is performed based on the winning of the gaming medium in the winning device. , A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that derives and displays the display result, a hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) that stores hold information related to the variable display that has not yet been started, and after the end of the advantageous state. Promotional notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period, and holding information stored by the holding storage means in the predetermined period. When the number reaches the upper limit of the hold information (4, etc.) that can be stored in the hold storage means, the arrival notification means (output of "arrival", etc.) indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed (the arrival notification means). Corresponds to the effect control microcomputer 100 and the like, the suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and the suggestion effect. The title notifying means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) is provided, and the title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. There are (for example, FIGS. 43 (D), (F)) gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. In addition, since the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect is improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which a player can be prevented from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period and the effect of production is improved, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine 901), and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests control to the advantageous state. And a title notifying means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect, the title notifying means performs the suggestion effect when a specific period elapses from the start of the suggestion effect. Examples thereof include a gaming machine capable of notifying the corresponding title (for example, FIGS. 43 (D) and 43 (F)). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.
(Examples of other forms)
Hereinafter, other examples of the form will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
FIG. 35 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 35, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 905 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 905, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 9025B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 905, a winning ball device 906A and a variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

The winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 906B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 36). The variable winning ball device 906B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 906A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 906B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 9081 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 906B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 35, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 9010 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 9010, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 906A and the variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 36), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball easily enters the big winning door. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 9010.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 9010 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 35, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

On the left side of the image display device 905, a passage gate 9041 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 9041, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 for gaming effects are provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (not shown in FIG. 35), a movable body 9032 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 9030 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 9031A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area. The stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 36).

A push button 9031B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 36).

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a stick controller 9031A and a push button 9031B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 901 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 9030. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 9041, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 906B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 906A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 906B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 901, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 905, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R and / or a game effect lamp 909. It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 9032, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 905, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 905, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 905 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with, for example, a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 9011 includes a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

The CPU 90103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 90101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 90102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped in part or in whole. In addition, you may expand all or a part of the program stored in ROM 90101 into RAM 90102 and execute it on RAM 90 102.

The random number circuit 90104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 90103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 90105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, ordinary symbol display 9020, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) a display 9025A, a second hold display 9025B, a normal figure hold display 9025C, etc., a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal (a game ball has passed or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 9021, start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 90111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 9082 for a big prize opening door. To transmit.

The main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) gives a production control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 9012. The effect control command output from the main board 9011 is relayed by the relay board 9015 and supplied to the effect control board 9012. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 9011 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 9032, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 9012 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125.

The effect control CPU 90120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 90123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 90121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 9012, and is an effect to be executed. (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 are used, and the RAM 90 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A or the push sensor 9035B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal indicating the operation content as appropriate). It may also instruct the control unit 90123.

The display control unit 90123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120.

The display control unit 90123 supplies the image display device 905 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905. The display control unit 90123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 9013 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 90123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 9032 to the movable body 9032 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 9032.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let me.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 90123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 90120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 9032 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 9032, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 90124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 9011. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 9011, such as the effect control board 9012, the sound control board 9013, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 901, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
First, the main operation of the main board 9011 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 90103. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 90103 on the main board 9011.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 90102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 9012 (step S909). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 905.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 90102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 90103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 9002 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 9011 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 90103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 90102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 9012 (step S907). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 905 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 90120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 90103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special figure game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 90103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 9041). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 906B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 9020, and the normal figure hold display 9025C is turned on to display the normal figure hold number.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 90103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 90103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 38 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 9012. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, by executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 38 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 9012 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 90101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 9011 and various decisions on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control board 9012, various tables are stored in the ROM 90121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 9012)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 9012. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 9032, such as control for driving the movable body 9032 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9074), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or stored in the RAM 90122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 90123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S9075, the effect control process process is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 9032. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the effect control process process in step S9076, the effect random number update process is executed (step S9077), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S9073. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S9073.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9076 of FIG. 40 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S90161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 9011. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 9011. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 90123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 90123 causes the image display device 905 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the display control unit 90123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 905. , Driving the movable body 9032, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and commanding the lamp control board 9014 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 9011 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 9011. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 9011 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 9011 to specify the end of the big hit game state. It is updated to 7 "and the production process during the big hit is completed.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 42 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1 ′ -1 and PA1 ′, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, Display of reach loss fluctuation patterns PA2'-1 to PA2'-6, PA3'-1 to PA3'-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "loss". Fluctuation patterns PB2'-1 to PB2'-6, PB3'-1 to PB3'-4, etc., in which the result is a "big hit" are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 42 (B), and the normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B. <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3'-1 to PA3'-4 and the like shown in FIG. 42 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3'-1 to PB3'-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. .. In addition, although FIG. 42 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively aroused and the effect of production is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 90120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 43A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 905, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a specific period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 905 is as shown in FIG. 43 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 908. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 43 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 905 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 908. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 43 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 905 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a specific period elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 43 (F). Then, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 908 to notify the title of super reach B. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 43 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 43 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 43 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introduction portion until the notification is made, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 43 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 43 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 905. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 908. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 43 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 43 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 905 and the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 43 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 43 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 905. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 43 (D), (F), (Fig. 43). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a specific period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a specific period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, the title is notified. The title may be notified after a specific period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 905, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 905 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 905 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the entire background is used as the background for title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 43 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), a determination effect is executed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 905. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (D). A definite decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the title notification is terminated before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 905 to execute the variable display, but the reach effect is in progress. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 905 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 45 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 45, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 45 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 43 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars of. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 908. As shown in FIGS. 46 (D) and 46 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 908 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 (A) to 46 (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the game effect lamp 909. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 9011, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 908, and the like displayed on the image display device 905 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

FIGS. 46 (G) to 46 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 46A to 46F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 46 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 908, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 908 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 46 (J) and 46 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 46 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) are shown. ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 905. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 9031B is detected, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 9032 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 48, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled by the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 90120 within the variable display start setting process of step S90171 of FIG. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 9011 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 48, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 50 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in FIG. 50 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 50, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the action mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 905, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 902 or the game machine frame 903. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of, for example, the image display device 905, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 905, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 905, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 905, the transferred zone. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 44 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

51 and 52 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 905, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 51 (C) to (F) and 52 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 905. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 9031B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 52 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be performed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 52 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 52 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 9031A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 52 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 51 and 52. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, operation effect image to be displayed, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red characters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 908 notifies the speaker to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 909 emits light to notify the player. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 909 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 53 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 53A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 905. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 53 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 53 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 53 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a ally character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 53 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 53 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 53 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 53 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 53 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 49. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 49 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature 150IW)
Next, the feature unit 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 54-1 and 54-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 902 (see FIG. 35) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 150IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 150IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 150IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 150IW003a, and when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 150IW003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 9011 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state of being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 150IW051, is housed in the board case 150IW201 together with the main board 9011, and the setting key 150IW051 does not open the board case 150IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side of the substrate case 150IW201 so that the board case 150IW201 can be operated.

Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 using the door key of. Further, since the setting key 150IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 150IW051. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 150IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, the board case 150IW201 is provided with a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 9011 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged in front of the main board 9011 in the board case 150IW201. Since the main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back side of the gaming board 902 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in the feature unit 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. There is a risk that the setting key 150IW051 will be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 54-2 and 54-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a is the right end portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. A security cover 150IW500A that covers the back side is attached. The curity cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 150IW201. Further, the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 150IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 54-2, the long piece 150IW500Ab abuts (or is close to) the right portion of the board case 150IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Thereby, the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Therefore, the setting key 150IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54-3, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the setting key 150IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and separates from the long piece 150IW500Ab. When the covering state of 150IW500Ab is released, it becomes an operable state.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW is maintained in a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 150IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Unless the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 150IW003 is opened by the door key or the like, the setting key 150IW051 cannot be operated to change the set value.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901. A setting key 150IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 901. Since there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed by operating the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 150IW003, the security cover 150IW500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a restricted state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, the board case 150IW201 is housed in the board case 150IW201 through the transparent security cover 150IW500A. Since the main board 9011 and the like can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 9011 on which electronic components such as the CPU 90103 are mounted, the sealing seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101, and by using the RAM 90102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are executed. Further, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by executing the random number generation program.

In this feature unit 150IW, on the side of the main board 9011, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in CPU 90103, or may be updated by random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-4 and 54-5, which are prepared by the CPU 90103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 90101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main board 9011, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 54-4 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 54-4 (B), and FIG. 54. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 54-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of 2 or 3, the higher the advantage is. In this feature unit 150IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
54-4 (A) to 54-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 54-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You are supposed to win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) than the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/280 for non-probability change, 1/28 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 54-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The winning probability of a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 150IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the CPU 90103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 54-4 (A) to (C) to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using a separate table for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 54-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 150IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in 901 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 54-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 90101. In the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 54-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2". When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 54-5 (B). In the feature unit 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 9012 side, the start of the jackpot gaming state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the effect control board 9012 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S90117 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 9012 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 54-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling can be achieved. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 150IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 150IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 150IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability change control, the number of controls, etc.) between the big hit type A to the big hit type C, and the fanfare period and the interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 150IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 150IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 150IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the game property (so-called probabilistic loop type) in which the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probabilistic state is 65% is set. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the type of big hit. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In (middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be used in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state or a jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 54-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in ROM 90101. As shown in FIG. 54-5 (C), the feature unit 150IW is provided with small hit types A to C as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 54-5 (C), in the feature unit 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the opening period and the number of opening times of the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 90101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". The small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 54-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 150IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 54-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 150IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-6 (A) and (B), normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (A) has a higher rate of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (B), and is a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-6 (A) and 54-6 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, depending on the set value, at times other than non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <" 3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". It is configured so that the ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratio of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. It is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

The feature unit 150IW displays a common background image on the image display device 905 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-6 (A) and 54-6 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 905 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment during the special period or the period from the time when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 54-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine.

As shown in FIG. 54-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 150IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by differentiating the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. For example, non-reach loss A to C. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the decorative pattern shaking display and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in the appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final) is set according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the setting in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is high may make the fluctuation time longer.

The feature unit 150IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time as compared with other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 150IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 54-8 to 54-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 150IW. In the feature unit 150IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S902 shown in FIG. 37.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 90103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 90120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 150IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time is set in the effect control means activation waiting timer from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 90120. Next, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004 and the processes of steps 150IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 150IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 90120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are sent before the effect control CPU 90120 is started, and the command may be missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 90103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch was pressed when the power was turned on to the gaming machine (step 150IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power cutoff process (see step 150IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 150IWS006 when the power is turned on to the game machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which a RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 150IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power cutoff process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. May be good.

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S904 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150IWS007, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS007; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S905, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 150IWS008). In step 150IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data of the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step 150IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step 150IWS008; Yes), the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3". (Step 150IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 150IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (N in step 150IWS008) or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 150IWS009). The CPU 90103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of the set values "1" to "3" (N in step 150IWS009), the CPU 90103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

In step 150IWS012, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 150IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear process includes a RAM clear 1 process (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 process (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 90103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 90102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 90103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 90102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 90103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is off (N in step 150IWS012), when the setting key 150IW051 is off (N in step 150IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 150IWS013). In step 150IWS014 N), the CPU 90103 controls to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS017).

Next, the CPU 90103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 150IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 90103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 150IWS018). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 90103 shifts to step 150IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 90103 controls the display monitor 150IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred. Further, the CPU 90103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 150IWS020). Then, the processes after step 150IWS018 are repeatedly executed.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS007 to S020, in the feature unit 150IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150IWS007, S008, Y in step 150IWS009), a power failure occurs during the setting change, and the like. In the case (Y of step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, and the set value after step 150IWS025. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 150IWS011; No), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 90103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 150IWS022 and step 150IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first detected to be turned on when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. After that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes to check whether the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. However, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, instead of checking the status of the clear switch directly, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. (See steps 150IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 90103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 controls to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the setting value is executed to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM error flag is set (that is, if an error in the RAM 90102 is detected), the CPU 90103 fills the set value confirmation buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 90102 for storing the current set value). Set to the set value "1" (step 150IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030. At this time, the CPU 90103 resets the RAM error flag.

When the effect control board 9012 side receives the setting confirmation command or the setting change command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image on the image display device 905). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 9031B is pressed on the effect control board 9012 side, "maintenance mode" or the like may be displayed and the mode may be changed to the maintenance mode. "Maintenance mode" is, for example, real-time clock date and time setting, error occurrence history (recording when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of the set value). When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 90103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 150IWS030). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 90103 shifts to step 150IWS031 and executes the power cutoff process (step 150IWS031). In the power cutoff process of step 150IWS031, the CPU 90103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power cutoff signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power off processing, when the CPU 90103 detects that the power off signal is output, it executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data (for example, a backup flag, a checksum) in the backup RAM area. do.

Next, the CPU 90103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). Further, the CPU 90103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 150IWS033).

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 150IWS043 as it is.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 sets the setting changing flag (step 150IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial set flag indicating that the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is set (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 90102 and is a buffer for setting an input state (whether it is an on state or an off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the gaming machine is turned on), the process proceeds to step 150IWS039 as it is.

If the initially set flag is not set (that is, if the value has never been set in the clear switch buffer since the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 90103 puts the clear switch buffer on. The indicated value (eg, "1") is set (step 150IWS037). Further, the CPU 90103 sets the initial set flag (step 150IWS038).

Next, the CPU 90103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 90102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the previous clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set if the clear switch is in the off state.

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150IWS040). Next, in the CPU 90103, the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state (for example, "0"), and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 150IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state, the CPU 90103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (updated and stored for the already stored set value) (step 150IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display of the display monitor 150IW029 is updated and displayed to "2", and the set value "2" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display of the display monitor 150IW029 is updated and displayed to "3", and the set value "3" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display of the display monitor 150IW029 is updated and displayed to "1", and the set value "1" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer.

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, the processes of steps 150IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is turned off, the CPU 90103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) by executing the above steps 150IWS025 to S043 (steps 150IWS025, S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (Y in steps 150IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 150IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 150IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150IWS033. , The security information timer is set in step 150IWS044, and the information output process (step S9023) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, by executing the process of step 150IWS020, the security signal is output externally even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. In this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is reset.

Next, the CPU 90103 resets the setting changing flag (step 150IWS045). Further, the CPU 90103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). Further, the CPU 90103 controls to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS047).

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 150IWS049. The processing of steps 150IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S906 and S907 shown in FIG. 37.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear 1 process and performs the process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102 (150IWS051). The processing of steps 150IWS052 to S055 in the feature unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S909 to S9012 shown in FIG. 37.

FIG. 54-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 150IW, as shown in FIG. 54-11, when the setting key 150IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 150IWS035 to S042) are executed, and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is executed, and the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and if the clear switch is off, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed. Only the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 54-12 (A) and 54-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 9082.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54-12 (C), when the store clerk of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 90103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

As shown in FIG. 54-12 (D), in the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, the CPU 90103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the clerk of the amusement park or the like in the setting change process. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the clear switch is operated). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 90102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54-12 (E), the CPU 90103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 150IW051 is turned off by the operation of a store clerk or the like of the game hall, thereby turning off the display monitor 150IW029. Notify the clerk or the like that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102.

If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 54-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 90103 ends the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a variable display result, a big hit type, a lottery for determining a variable pattern, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 150IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 150IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 150 IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54-12, the case where the set value is displayed by using the first display among the four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. The set value may be displayed by using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 150IW029, for example. Further, for example, the display monitor 150IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays "-S-2". The 4-digit display of "-S-3" may be performed on the display monitor 150IW029 if the set value is "3". Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110) in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 54-13 and 54-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S90110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 90103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 150IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 150IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 90103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 150IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 90103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 150IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 150IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 90103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 90102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 90103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102.

Then, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 150IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 90102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 90102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 90103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 150IWS107). The CPU 90103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

Next, the CPU 90103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 90102 to the effect control board 9012 (step 150IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 150IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the processing of step 150IWS047. By executing the process of 150IWS108, the set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS108, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send commands. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command for directly specifying a set value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the set values "1" to "3") is transmitted, while in step 150IWS108, the set value is set. A identifiable variation pattern command may be transmitted, and the variation pattern commands may be configured to be prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the setting value "1", commands 1C00 (H) to are prepared as variation pattern commands. , The setting value "2" may be configured to prepare commands 2C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands, and the setting value "3" may be configured to prepare commands 3C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example). ) Minute fluctuation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern command corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 150IWS047) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 150IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting the fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands may be sent at the time of turning on the power and at the starting of the fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to send the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 90120 side is configured depending on which set value is used. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 90103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 9012 according to the current gaming state (step 150IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 controls to send a probabilistic state background designation command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background designation command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 90103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 54-4) with a random number value MR1, and if they match, a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit is performed. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 150IWS110), the CPU 90103 performs a small hit determination process (step 150IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 150IWS111), the CPU 90103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 150IWS112), and proceeds to step 150IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 150IWS111), that is, if the value is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 150IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 150IWS110), the CPU 90103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 90103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 54-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 150IWS114).

Further, the CPU 90103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 90103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 150IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an outlier symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90111) (step 150IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 150IW will be described. FIG. 54-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the feature unit 150IW. In the feature unit 150IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect mode change process (step 150IWS201) to change the effect mode when the effect control random number update process of step S9077 is executed, and then the effect mode change process is executed (step 150IWS201). The process returns to step S9073.

The feature unit 150IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 905 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 150IWS201, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 9012, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 150IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 90120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

54-16 and 54-17 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S9075). The effect control command received from the main board 9011 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 150IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 150IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 150IWS303). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 150IWS304), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 90122 (step). 150IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 150IWS306).

Since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by the power supply in the feature unit 150IW, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 9012 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this feature unit 150IW, the set value command is sent when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normal due to missing commands or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 150IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 150IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when reading the setting value command on the effect control CPU 90120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, it may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 150IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 9012 side receives either the initialization designation command or the recovery command from the main board 9011 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 150IW receives a predetermined initial result on the image display device 905. (Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed on the image display device 905 until the first variation display is started) is controlled (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command or a recovery command (step 150IWS307), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to combine an even initial roll (for example, "246" or "224"), which is a combination of even decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial roll (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial roll which is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 150IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

FIG. 54-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 150IWS309, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 54-18 (A). Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 54-18 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined is higher in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 905 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 54-18 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 905 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial roll using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 54-18 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 150IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 54-18 (A), for the set value "1", the ratio determined to be an odd initial result is the lowest, and it may not be determined to be a special initial result. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where the odd initial roll or the special initial roll is displayed and the player is disappointed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS314.

FIG. 54-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-18 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS312 to S313, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the odd-numbered initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display the initial result determined in steps 150IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 150IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 905. In, control is performed to display even initial rolls (step 150IWS315).

By executing the process of step 150IWS315, the feature unit 150IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial number of symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set to be lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 54-18 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial result is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the setting value command cannot be received normally, such as the combination of the symbols of "???" as the initial result in the effect mode B. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 150IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 150IWS316), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the set value abnormality error notification (step 150IWS317). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character display such as "a setting value abnormality error has occurred" on the image display device 905, or sounds a voice or an error sound indicating a setting value abnormality error from the speakers 908L and 908R. It controls to output and to make the game effect lamp 909 and the LED emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909 and the LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In that case, it is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for specifying the variation pattern) (step 150IWS320), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received variation pattern command in the RAM. Store in the area (step 150IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command that specifies whether to make a big hit or not, a big hit type, and a small hit type) (step 150IWS323), for effect control. The CPU 90120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 150IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 150IWS325), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step 150IWS325). Step 150 IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of the jackpot game) (step 150IWS327), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 150IWS329), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS 301.

The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial roll or an even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so as to be displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is 3. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial roll, one of these initial rolls may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 150IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The setting suggestion based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tendency, and the jackpot suggestion effect executed during the jackpot (for example, during the jackpot game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be configurable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 9031B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be able to change.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 54-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the end of the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 150IWS502, step 150IWS503), and the image display device 905. Control is performed to end the display of the displayed puzzle display (step 150IWS504). The puzzle display is started by executing the process of step 150IWS518 described later.

Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the time measuring result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 150IWS507). (Step 150IWS508). In step 150IWS508, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when a predetermined period has elapsed without executing the variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit game state), or when the game has not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means meets a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150IWS509, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS510). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 150IWS511). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS516.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect that is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. The decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed.

FIG. 54-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (A). Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 54-20 (A), determination values are assigned so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous setting value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting was changed when the power was turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS512). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 150IWS513). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS516.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS512 to S513, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS514). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS516.

FIG. 54-20 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-20 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS514 to S515, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150IWS511, S513, S515 (step 150IWS516). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS518.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the step 150 IWS517 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 150IWS514, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 54-20 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and first) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 150IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, it may be possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it may be possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 54-20 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-20 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 90120 controls to execute a customer waiting demo effect including execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 150 IWS517 is executed, for example, in the image display device 905, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 150IWS517 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the operation is performed. The image display device 905 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. It may be possible to store the information and execute an effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the information. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. Further, the process of step 150IWS517 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code including the execution history information at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to start displaying the puzzle display based on the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter (step 150IWS518).

In this example, a puzzle effect may be executed in which the pieces of the jigsaw puzzle are gradually aligned during the variable display of the decorative pattern. When the puzzle effect is executed, each time the puzzle effect is executed, an effect is executed in which one of the pieces of puzzle 1 to puzzle 3 is aligned one by one. Then, after the puzzle production is executed a plurality of times, it is suggested that the set value is "1" when the puzzle 1 is finally completed with all the pieces, and the set value is set when the puzzle 2 is completed with all the pieces. It is suggested that it is "2", and when all the pieces of puzzle 3 are completed, it is suggested that the set value is "3".

Also, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern each time, but only the variable display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the variable display in which the pieces of any of the puzzles increase). Only) The puzzle is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed and the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, the process of step 150IWS518 is executed, so that the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 905 and the puzzle 1 is displayed. It is possible to check the gathered state of each of the pieces of ~ 3.

The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces collected in puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces collected in the puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces collected in the puzzle 3. In this example, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by the power supply, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped for the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter stored in the RAM 90122. It is assumed that the value of the first piece counter to the third piece counter is 0 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine.

In step 150IWS518, an image of puzzle 1 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the first piece counter is collected is displayed, and an image of puzzle 2 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the second piece counter is collected is displayed. The puzzle display is displayed by displaying the image of the puzzle 3 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter is collected.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 54-21 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S90171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 41. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 150IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 150IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 150IWS602 by the effect control CPU 90120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 90120 stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 150IWS602, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 150IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result specification command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. do.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. .. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 150IWS602. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The effect control CPU 90120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by power supply, the value of the fluctuation number counter stored in the RAM 90122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the game is played. When the power is turned on to the machine, it shall start from the state where the value of the fluctuation count counter is 0.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS604).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of the puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the in-game suggestion effect or puzzle effect if the execution of the in-game suggestion effect or puzzle effect is determined (step 150IWS606). .. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150IWS607).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 905 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, when the execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 150IWS604, the process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 is selected according to the selected process table. And by executing the variable display during effect process (step S90172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the execution of the puzzle effect is determined in the puzzle effect setting process of step 150IWS605, the process table including the puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process are performed according to the selected process table. By executing (step S90172), the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 serves as an effect device (image display device 905 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 908L, 908R as production parts) is executed (step 150IWS608).

In the feature unit 150IW, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 90120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 150IWS609). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 150IWS610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 54-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 150IWS604) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S90171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 90120 is in the special period (Y in step 150IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS702), and the effect is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 150IWS701), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 150IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special period is in progress in step 150IWS701.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 150IWS705).

FIG. 54-23 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 54-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), the highly reliable in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and 54-23 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 150 IWS707).

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and 54-23 (B), for the set value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestion effect during the game is low, and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest, and it may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS709).

FIG. 54-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 54-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is restricted not to be executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 150IWS708, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 54-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game of a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , Different aspects of the suggestion effect during the game may be feasible. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 150IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. However, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. It may be set to be high, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Puzzle production setting process)
54-24 and 54-25 are flowcharts showing an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not the puzzle completion flag indicating that any of the puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process ends.

By executing the process of step 150IWS801, in this example, the puzzle effect may be executed from the power-on of the gaming machine to the completion of any of the puzzles 1 to 3, and the puzzles 1 to 3 may be executed. When any one of the puzzles is completed, the puzzle effect is not executed thereafter (that is, only one of the puzzles is completed, and two or more puzzles are not completed).

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, it may be configured so that two or more puzzles may be completed.

If the puzzle completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the puzzle effect, and executes the puzzle effect. Whether or not it is determined (step 150IWS802). FIG. 54-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the puzzle production determination table. As shown in FIGS. 54-26, in this example, it is determined that the puzzle effect is executed with a probability of 1% when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

Generally, in a game store, when a game is continuously played between the time the game store opens and the time the game store closes, it is possible to execute a variable display of a decorative pattern up to about 3000 times (however, the game machine). There are differences depending on the model). In this example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces each, and when any one of puzzles 1 to 3 has up to 5 pieces, the puzzle is completed. In this example, even if the puzzles do not have all the pieces, the judgment values are assigned so that it is easy to arrange 3 to 4 pieces, so by the time any of the puzzles 1 to 3 is completed. It takes about 11 to 13 times to execute the puzzle effect, and since the determination ratio of the puzzle effect execution is 1%, it takes about 1100 to 1300 times to display the variation of the decorative pattern. Therefore, in this example, after the game store opens, one of the puzzles is designed to be completed in about the afternoon. Not limited to such an aspect, the puzzle may be completed in the morning.

In this example, the case where one kind of puzzle production determination table shown in FIGS. 54-26 is used is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different puzzle effect determination tables may be used according to the time zone, the number of times the variable display is executed, and the setting by the game clerk so that the execution rate of the puzzle effect changes.

Further, in this example, the case where the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces each is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more. It may be configured to be present. Further, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 1 is 4 pieces, while the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 3 is 5. , The maximum number of pieces may be different for each puzzle.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). If it is decided not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process is terminated as it is. When it is decided to execute the puzzle effect, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol from the power-on of the gaming machine is 1000 or less), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table for determining, the puzzle production mode determination table A is selected (step 150IWS805).

If the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 1000 or less (that is, if the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol from the power-on of the gaming machine is more than 1000), the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. It is confirmed whether or not the set value is set to the set value "1" (step 150IWS806). If the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 90120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

If it is not the set value "1", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "2" (step 150IWS808). If the set value is "2", the effect control CPU 90120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as the table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

If the setting value is not "2" (that is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the setting value "3", the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table, the puzzle production mode determination table D is selected (step 150IWS810).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810 to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

FIG. 54-27 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the puzzle production mode determination table. Of these, FIGS. 54-27 (A) show a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150IWS805. Further, FIG. 54-27 (B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected in step 150IWS807. Further, FIG. 54-27 (C) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150IWS809. Further, FIG. 54-27 (D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150IWS810.

As shown in FIGS. 54-27, in each puzzle production mode determination table A to D, as the production mode (type) of the puzzle production, determination values are obtained for the puzzle production 1, the puzzle production 2, and the puzzle production 3, respectively. Is assigned. The puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in such a manner that the number of pieces of the puzzle 1 is increased by one among the puzzles 1 to 3. Further, the puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in such a manner that the number of pieces of the puzzle 2 is increased by one among the puzzles 1 to 3. Further, the puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in such a manner that the pieces of the puzzle 3 are increased by one among the puzzles 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 54-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 3% higher than the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 is slightly increased until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times. Therefore, in this example, for example, even if the set value set is the setting value "1" having a low advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having a high advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4 pieces). Is easier to get together.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (B), in the puzzle production mode determination table B, the determination ratio of the puzzle production 1 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle productions 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "1", the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle is executed. The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination rate of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "2", the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle is executed. The rate at which 2 pieces increase by 1 is slightly higher.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (D), in the puzzle production mode determination table D, the determination ratio of the puzzle production 3 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle productions 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "3", the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle is executed. The rate at which 3 pieces are increased by 1 is slightly higher.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 54-27, in any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3 as compared with the other puzzle effects. Since it is only% higher, it is easy to collect all the pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 to some extent, and it is a puzzle other than the puzzle that finally has the maximum number of pieces (5 pieces in this example) out of puzzles 1 to 3. However, at least 3 to 4 pieces are configured to be easy to align.

The method of constructing the puzzle production mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the production mode of the puzzle production using different puzzle production mode determination tables according to the setting of the game clerk, and to change the selection ratio of the production mode of the puzzle production. You may. For example, depending on the setting, puzzles 1 to 3 may be arranged with pieces evenly to some extent, or a specific puzzle may be made easier to arrange pieces than other puzzles, or may be changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 1 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS812). When the puzzle effect 1 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "1" (step 150IWS813). If the set value is "1", the process proceeds to step 150IWS815 as it is.

If the set value is not "1", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the process does not shift to the processes of steps 150IWS815 to S818, but shifts to step 150IWS819. That is, in this case, the value of the first piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of puzzle 1 are gathered, and when puzzle production 1 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and puzzle 1 is formed. It will be completed, but the set value is not the setting value "1", and the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, so step 150IWS815 ~ It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S818.

When the set value is "1" (Y in step 150IWS813) or the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is executed. Puzzle effect 1 Set the execution flag (step 150 IWS815). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 1 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, and the steps are taken according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and confirms whether or not the value of the first piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). When the puzzle effect 2 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "2" (step 150IWS820). If the set value is "2", the process proceeds to step 150IWS822 as it is.

If the set value is not "2", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the process does not shift to the processes of steps 150IWS822 to S825, but shifts to step 150IWS826. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 2 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 2 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 2 is completed. It will be completed, but the set value is not the setting value "2", and the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, so step 150IWS822 ~ It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S825.

When the set value is "2" (Y in step 150IWS820) or the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS821), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is executed. Puzzle effect 2 Set the execution flag (step 150IWS82). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 2 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and the steps are taken according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 3 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). When the puzzle effect 3 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "3" (step 150IWS827). If the set value is "3", the process proceeds to step 150IWS829 as it is.

If the set value is not "3", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process does not shift to the processes of steps 150IWS829 to S832, and the puzzle effect setting process ends. That is, in this case, the value of the third piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 3 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 3 is completed. It will be completed, but the set value is not the setting value "3", and the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, so step 150IWS829 ~ It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S832.

When the set value is "3" (Y in step 150IWS827) or when the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is executed. Puzzle effect 3 Set the execution flag (step 150 IWS829). In this example, the process table including the puzzle effect 3 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, and the steps are taken according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

In this example, the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set do not match due to the processing of steps 150IWS913, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828. In the case of, a case is shown in which the puzzle effect is canceled to prevent such a situation from occurring, but the processing mode is not limited to that. For example, step 150IWS811 may be executed again to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect until the effect mode of the puzzle effect that does not cause such a disagreement is determined. Further, for example, a table excluding the effect mode of the puzzle effect that causes such a disagreement may be used to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect.

In addition, in this example, the case of controlling so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set does not match is shown, but only in such an aspect. Instead, it may be configured so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set may not always match. For example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of completing the puzzle 3 is the highest, but the puzzle 1 or the puzzle 2 may be completed in some cases.

Also, for puzzle production, check whether the set value command reception flag is set (whether the set value command is received normally), and if the set value command is not received normally, the game Similar to the determination of the pre-suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution of the puzzle effect may be restricted.

(During big hit production decision processing)
FIG. 54-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit medium effect determination process. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S90114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 150IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

In step S150IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the first is shown in FIG. 54-29 (A). One big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-29 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demo effect. Further, in this feature unit 150IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 905. After that, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed according to the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (A1), after the decorative symbol to be a jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 905, the figure is shown. As shown in 54-31 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 150IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 150 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, even though an unfavorable setting value is set, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode, and the player is disappointed. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

FIG. 54-29 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIGS. 54-29 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and it may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS905 to S906, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the step 150IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 150IWS905, in the case where the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing his interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the jackpot suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54-29 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54-29 (B), the ratio of not executing the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio of not being executed is different depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, the feature unit 150IW is configured to execute a big hit middle suggestion effect as a setting suggestion effect when a big hit occurs in a specific period, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a advance notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 150IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 905. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B2), the movable member 150IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 905.

As shown in FIGS. 54-30 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 905. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 150IW, the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the bonus effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, so that the movable member 150IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 905 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 150IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 150IWS907, by using the character effect effect determination table shown in FIGS. 54-29 (D), the character effect effect is not executed when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit middle suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by reducing the execution ratio of the character effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 54-29 (D), and the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 150IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 150IWS908).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 905, a light guide plate 150IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided, and the light guide plate 150IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 150IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 150IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflection unit provided on the light guide plate 150IW103. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B3), light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Character appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 905.

In step 150IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 54-29 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 54-30 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 150IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the hobby of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

Next, the production mode of the puzzle production will be described. 54-32 to 54-34 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode of the puzzle effect. As shown in FIGS. 54-32 (A), in the variable display of the decorative symbol for which the execution of the puzzle effect is not determined, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 905, and the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right is not displayed. The fluctuation display of is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-32 (B), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time ends, and further, as shown in FIG. 54-32 (C), the fluctuation of the next decorative symbol is performed. It is assumed that the display has started. In the example shown in FIGS. 54-32 (C), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is determined when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-32 (C), for example, the puzzle effect effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 905, and the puzzle effect is started.

54-32 (D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 54-32 (C). As shown in FIGS. 54-32 (D), the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are displayed on the puzzle effect screen 150IW106. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54-32 (D), one piece 150IW107-1 is already gathered in the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), and one piece is still gathered in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2). However, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces have already been collected.

Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (E), one new piece 150IW108-1 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (F), the new piece 150IW108-1 is finally fitted in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is increased by one. The production is executed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is erased, and the puzzle effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is not determined in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, and as shown in FIG. 54-33 (G), the image display device. In 905, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right is displayed.

Then, after that, the puzzle effect is not executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. 54-33 (H). It is assumed that it is in a state. In this example, during the customer waiting demonstration display, for example, the puzzle display display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 54-33 (H). Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current collection of pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are displayed.

After that, it is assumed that the game is started again, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also executed a plurality of times. Then, when the variable display of a certain decorative pattern is started after that, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is decided and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. FIG. 54-34 (I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIGS. 54-34 (I), the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) already has three pieces 150IW107-1 and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) already has four pieces. Therefore, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been collected.

Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (J), one new piece 150IW108-5 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is increased by one. The production is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (K), the number of pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is up to five, which is the maximum number, and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is completed. In, a character display such as "Puzzle 2 completed!" Is displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 54-34 (L), a character "2" also appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the set value is the set value "2". Is suggested.

In the example shown in FIGS. 54-34 (L), the display of the number "2" directly suggests that the set value is "2". I can't be limited. For example, instead of such a direct expression, when the puzzle is completed, a picture corresponding to the setting value "2" (a picture reminiscent of the setting value "2") appears and is displayed. May be.

In addition, in FIGS. 54-32 to 54-34, the case where the puzzle 2 is completed and it is suggested that the set value is "2" is shown, but the set value "1" and the set value "3" are suggested. In this case, the puzzle effect is executed according to the same effect mode.

In the feature unit 150IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 905 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. You may give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 905 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the ratio of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the character effect effect and the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is made to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the effect of the accessory and the effect of the light guide plate, and includes the control of outputting a predetermined sound, the control of vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and the control of emitting a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By doing so, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or less noticeable).

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 150IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold storage becoming 0 or the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold storage number occurs. Display control, output control of predetermined sound, light emission control of predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B during the predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 150IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the feature portion 150IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 54-35 (A) and 54-35 (B), a security cover 150IW500B composed of a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 150IW201. The right end of the long piece 150IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 150IW201, and is set via the through hole 150IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 150IW500Bb. The key 150IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the security cover 150IW500B (long piece 150IW500Bb) slides in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 150IW201 with the setting key 150IW051 covered. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is released by sliding the security cover 150IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. It can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 54-35 (A) and 54-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 150IW500B with respect to the board case 150IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 54-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B has a protrusion dimension from the substrate case 150IW201. By sliding the pachinko machine 1 to the board case 150IW201 until the length becomes L2 (the pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), the clerk of the game hall or the like operates the setting key 150IW051 to set the pachinko game machine 901. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 54-36 (B), the security cover 150IW500B is attached to the board case 150IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500B will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 150IW500B covers the setting key 150IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 150IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 150IW051 is maintained by the security cover 150IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 54-37 (A) and 54-37 (B) as modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 150IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. Between the covering position that covers the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and the uncovering position that is rotated from the covering position, centering on the vertical axis 150IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003. It may be rotatably supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb sets the setting key 150IW051 on the back side. The rotation from the covered state to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 150IW051. It should be possible to operate it. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is restricted from rotating while the security cover 150IW500C (long piece 150IW500Cb) covers the setting key 150IW051. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 150IW051. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-38 (A), the security cover 150IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 901 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 150IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 54-38 (B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 150IW500C. If the 150IW051 is not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 150IW500C covers the setting key 150IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, the feature portion 150IW exemplifies a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be changed by opening 150IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 54-39 (A) to 54-39 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through hole 150IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 so that the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through port 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 9011 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the setting key 150IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 9011 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through port 150IW003b, a door body 150IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 150IW003b is provided, and when the door body 150IW003c is closed, the setting key 150IW051 is used. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 54-39 (B) and 54-39 (C), when the door body 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 150IW003a. Since the 150IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the game machine frame 150IW003 so as to be openable and closable, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 150IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. And can improve security.

As described above, the feature unit 150IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more periodic (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the effect of the gaming machine is not necessarily the same as that of the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Cannot be increased. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
A process table including a puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606 in the effect control CPU 90120 to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a puzzle effect), and step 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S90172) are performed. With the part to execute)
The suggestion effect execution means is
When a display is performed in which a plurality of specific components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the specific suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), the setting value "1" is suggested), and it is possible to execute.
When a display is performed in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the special suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), it is possible to execute the production) that suggests the set value "3").
In the case of the setting value "1" as shown in FIG. 54-27 (B), the display is performed in which the specific component and the special component are gathered in different modes depending on the set value. In, the execution rate of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are a little easy to gather. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54-27 (D), when the set value is "3". Has a slightly higher execution rate of the puzzle effect 3, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are a little easier to collect.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect of the effect is exhibited. Can be enhanced.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the first invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
A process table including a puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606 in the effect control CPU 90120 to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a puzzle effect), and step 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S90172) are performed. With the part to execute)
The suggestion effect execution means is
When a display is performed in which a plurality of specific components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the specific suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), the setting value "1" is suggested), and it is possible to execute.
When a display is performed in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the special suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), it is possible to execute the production) that suggests the set value "3").
In the case of the setting value "1" as shown in FIG. 54-27 (B), the display is performed in which the specific component and the special component are gathered in different modes depending on the set value. In, the execution rate of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are a little easy to gather. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54-27 (D), when the set value is "3". Has a slightly higher execution rate of the puzzle effect 3, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are a little easier to collect.),
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state).
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, a player. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the user. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

In this example, a case where an image such as a puzzle piece is displayed as a specific component or a special component is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the sounds of various musical instruments may be output as specific components or special components, and the set values set by aligning the output sounds may be suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 54-27, as a specific example of the aspect of "displaying that the specific component and the special component are gathered in different modes depending on the set value set". , The case where the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are configured so as to be easily gathered is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the set value, the puzzles may be gathered up to the maximum value (5 in this example) to make a difference whether or not the puzzle is completed, or the way the puzzle pieces are gathered halfway may be different. Various aspects can be considered, such as making the ease of obtaining pieces different.

Further, in this example, the case where the puzzle effect is executed and the puzzle pieces are gathered during the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform some kind of puzzle effect during the jackpot game to produce an effect in which puzzle pieces are gathered.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the specific suggestion effect when the set value is the specific set value (for example, the set value "1"), while the special suggestion effect cannot be executed (for example,). The effect control CPU 90120 can execute the puzzle effect 1 by executing steps 150IWS815 to S818 in the case of Y in step 150IWS813, but in the case of N in step 150IWS813 and Y in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815. -Cancel the puzzle production without shifting to S818)
According to such a configuration, the effect is produced in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Can be enhanced.

In this example, when the setting value is "1", the puzzle 1 is not completed, and when the setting value is "2", the puzzle 2 is not completed. Although the case where the setting value is "3" is configured so that the puzzle 3 or the like is not completed, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value "1" has a particularly low advantage, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value "3" having a high advantage is restricted from being completed, and in other cases, the puzzle 3 is actually completed. It may be configured so that a puzzle other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value may be completed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Whether or not the suggestion effect executing means displays to collect specific components or special components based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the lottery process for the presence or absence of the puzzle effect in step 150IWS802). Direction (For example, as shown in FIGS. 54-33 (E) and 54-34 (J), one new piece flies and becomes either puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3). It is stated that it is possible to perform a rendition that incites whether a new puzzle fits in), and according to such a configuration, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a game machine configured to be set to a set value.

In this example, one new piece flies, and a case is shown in which an effect is performed to incite which of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, you can perform an effect that incites whether or not you can acquire pieces, or you can display multiple pieces and then perform an effect that incites which of those pieces you can acquire. Often, various aspects are conceivable.

Further, in this example, as a "predetermined condition", a lottery process is performed for each variable display, and a case where the predetermined condition is satisfied based on winning the lottery process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the puzzle effect may be executed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the big hit, or the puzzle effect may be executed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the appearance of the predetermined advance notice effect. , Various aspects can be considered as predetermined conditions.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can display a collection of specific components and special components regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 54-27). In any of the puzzle production mode determination tables A to D, the execution rate of any of the puzzle productions 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3% higher than that of the other puzzle productions. Pieces are also easy to gather to some extent)
According to such a configuration, the effect is produced in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means displays (for example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIG. 54-33 (H)) in which the states of the specific component and the special component in the process of being collected can be confirmed (for example, for effect control). The part that executes step 150 IWS518 in the CPU 120)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of the puzzle pieces in the middle of being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of fluctuations is 1000 or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the highly advantageous setting value "3" are likely to be collected, so that the setting is highly advantageous to the player. It can be expected that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In this example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display so that the acquisition status of each puzzle piece can be confirmed and the completed puzzle status can be confirmed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the acquisition status of the pieces of each puzzle and the status of the completed puzzle may be incorporated into the interface screen and displayed at all times so that the puzzles can be constantly confirmed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means displays that a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) of special components corresponding to the high advantage are gathered even if the set value is a set value having a low advantage. (For example, as shown in FIG. 54-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 as compared with the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. It is 3% higher, and after turning on the power of the gaming machine, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the rate of increasing one piece of the puzzle 3 is slightly high).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). (Part of executing 150IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may be used. By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this feature unit 150IW, for example, it is assumed that the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by the power supply, and the values of each piece counter are reset when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the power supply is restarted. When it is thrown in, it is assumed that each puzzle is started in a reset state. It should be noted that at least a part of the RAM 90122 may be backed up to back up the value of each piece counter, or in this case, the piece counter stored in the RAM 90122 in response to the reset operation of the game clerk. It may be configured so that the value etc. can be reset.

Further, in the above case, for example, the gaming machine may be configured to start in a state where some pieces of some puzzles are gathered at the time of opening the gaming store. Further, in this case, the setting value may be suggested depending on which puzzle piece is activated in the gathered state. Further, there may be a pattern in which the gaming machine is activated when one of the puzzles is already completed when the gaming store is opened.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 7 of the first invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the first invention described above.

Further, the feature unit 150IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the set value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 90122) that can store specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 150 IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 90100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by having (a part for executing S034 and S048) is described, and according to this feature, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set as one of the setting values. Processing can be preferably performed in a game machine configured to be configurable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided for executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. )When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 90122) that can store specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 150 IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 90100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. The part that executes S034 and S048)
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state).
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, a player. It is possible to preferably perform processing in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the user. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

It should be noted that, in the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the mode of promotion notification for encouraging the winning device to win the game medium and the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means have reached the upper limit in the predetermined period. The set value may be suggested according to the mode of the arrival notification shown. For example, the mode of promotion notification and the mode of arrival notification are selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and the selection ratio of each notification mode of promotion notification or the selection ratio of each notification mode of arrival notification is determined according to the set value. By differentiating the above, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it is to perform the notification by a specific type of notification mode. By doing so, the notification modes of the promotion notification and the arrival notification are rich in variety, and moreover, the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each notification mode, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Can be done.
Further, when the promotion notification or the arrival notification is performed, the setting value suggestion effect may be performed by the effect display device. For example, a character is displayed on the effect display device when performing promotion notification or arrival notification, and the character is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like for each execution of promotion notification or arrival notification, and a set value is set. By making the selection ratio of each character different depending on the method, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is to perform the effect by a specific type of character in the promotion notification or the arrival notification. By doing so, if the promotion notification or the arrival notification is executed, the set value suggestion effect will be performed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, as a process to be executed "using specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150IWS026 and S027 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS025. Control whether or not to execute the process of changing the set value of steps 150IWS035 to S042 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 150IWS048. Although the case where the recovery process of step 150IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed depending on whether or not the flag is set is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be possible to control whether or not the operation switch is enabled immediately before the operation of changing the set value according to whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, since the operation means can also be used, an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used in combination as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 90102 and the operation means for performing the operation for changing the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost. can.

In this example, by using the clear switch in combination, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when the power is turned on to the game machine, so the clear switch must be turned on first when the power is turned on to the game machine. The RAM clear flag is set when it is detected, and after that, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 90102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set, and the set value is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be appropriately performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the game machine is started, the power supply to the game machine is started. A portion for executing steps 150 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 90100 to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of determining that the operation means has been operated based on the state of the operation means being switched from the off state to the on state is provided.
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is in step 150IWS041). When Y, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100). Executes step 150IWS037 when N in step 150IWS036)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S9021 to S9027 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can execute the timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs is provided.
The process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine to the execution of the timer interrupt process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 has a game control microcomputer 90100. Step 150 IWS025, S034, S048 is executed)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 90120). (Part of executing 150IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may be used. By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the second invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the feature unit 150IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (Part of executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in 90100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determination means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is a step. When Y at 150IWS041, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 , When N in step 150IWS036, step 150IWS037 is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, processing is suitably performed in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the set value is unintentionally changed even though the operating means (clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and the processing is appropriately performed. It can be carried out.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-60546.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (Part of executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in 90100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determination means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is a step. When Y at 150IWS041, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 , When N in step 150IWS036, step 150IWS037 is executed),
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state).
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, a player. It is possible to preferably perform processing in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the user. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the set value is unintentionally changed even though the operating means (clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and the processing is appropriately performed. It can be carried out. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage means (for example, RAM 90122) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started is provided.
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times when executing a plurality of processes including the set value change process (for example, steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 90100). Part to do)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the game machine is started, the power supply to the game machine is started. A portion for executing steps 150 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 90100 to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The first state storage means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operation means this time is provided.
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the storage content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the storage content of the second state storage means is in the on state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS041).
The first state storage means stores an on state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS037).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 90120). (Part of executing 150IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may be used. By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the third invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the present feature unit 150IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100). ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of fact, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a portion that executes steps 150IWS513, S707, S904).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100). ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a portion that executes steps 150 IWS513, S707, S904).
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and is set according to this feature. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a big hit suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 90120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122). Steps 150 IWS5111, S705, S902 are executed based on the set values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 90120). Executes steps 150IWS513, S707, S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity.

In the feature unit 150IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. be.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), 54-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 54-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be provided with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the fourth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulatory member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 150IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 54-2, 54-3, 54-35 to 54-38).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 12 of the fourth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fourth invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is set to N, S708 in step 150IWS514. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is set to N, S708 in step 150IWS514. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed),
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and is set according to this feature. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a big hit suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), 54-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 54-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be provided with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulatory member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 150IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 54-2, 54-3, 54-35 to 54-38).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 11 of the fifth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fifth invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value specification command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit middle suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100). ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect cannot be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, S906, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit middle suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and is set according to this feature. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a big hit suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 90120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122). Steps 150 IWS5111, S705, S902 are executed based on the set values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 150IWS515. , S709, S906)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), 54-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 54-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be provided with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulatory member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 150IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 54-2, 54-3, 54-35 to 54-38).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 12 of the sixth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the sixth invention described above.

It should be noted that the feature unit 150IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when it is controlled to the effect mode A, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the fifth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executably configured as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch whether to execute the suggestion effect by any of the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state and the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player. Configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the gaming state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, the configuration is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the sixth invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention shown above, and to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the above 4th to 6th inventions (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value command may be received, but the suggestion effect may be restricted when the received setting value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in the above and the set value stored in the previous time do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the above 4th to 6th inventions. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered setting value such as the set value "1" or "3", a series of villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fourth invention to the sixth invention. It may be configured to (restrict the suggestion effect).

Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fourth to sixth inventions cannot be normally received can also be applied to the puzzle effect as the suggestion effect.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And the game machine that is characterized by being able to execute the initial roll effect, etc.), according to this feature, the game is made to be interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And initial roll production, etc.)
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, a game is started. It is possible to make people interested in the state of the previous game machine and give them a motivation to play the game from an early time zone, and it is possible to enhance the game interest. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for production (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and such a configuration can enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 54). -20 (A), as shown in (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the seventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the seventh invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), 54-23 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), 54-23 (A), (B)).
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined period of time is described. Can be motivated to play games, and can enhance the interest of games. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (Fig. 54-6 (A),). B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 54-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). It is possible to execute the suggestion effect based on (for example, that the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the eighth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eighth invention described above.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) capable of transmitting information regarding an executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Further provided with a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, in the past. It is possible to confirm the suggested production that has been executed, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an image pickup device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 905) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the ninth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the ninth invention described above.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 54-29. See (D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). See D)),
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, it is of interest. It is possible to prevent the decrease. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 54-29 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 905) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 905).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 6 of the tenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the tenth invention described above.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is not preferable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) and
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is equipped with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.)
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4 or the like) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, it is of interest. It is possible to prevent the decrease. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a bonus effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 150IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode, see FIGS. 54-29 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 54-29 ( A), (see (B)) and can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 54-29 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is provided (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 9031B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) to which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 8 of the eleventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eleventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eleventh invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the twelfth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5).
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4, etc.) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 54-5 (A), (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 54-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 10 of the twelfth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 39) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (eg, variable time) for the variable display varies depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
Moreover,
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that performs variable display based on the winning of the game medium in the winning device and derives and displays the display result, and
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet, and
A promotion notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that executes promotion notification for prompting the winning device to win a game medium in a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information (4, etc.) that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, it indicates that the upper limit has been reached. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a reach notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) for executing notification (output of "arrival", etc.) is described, and according to this feature, gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high. Further, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value set, and with such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 54-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 7 of the thirteenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

In the feature unit 150IW, the case where the set value can be set in three stages of the set value "1" to "3" is shown, but the setting is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more stages are set. It may be configured to be configurable to a value, or it may be configured to be configurable to a two-step setting value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set to 6 levels, the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree for the big hit (reliability) when the setting value is "6". It may be configured to have the highest reliability).

Further, the configuration shown by the feature unit 150IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine. For example, when executing the puzzle effect shown by the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect, the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are executed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect, the title corresponding to the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK. ..

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display 8b ... 2nd special symbol display 9 ... Production display device 55 ... RAM
96 ... Time saving remaining number image 560 ... Game control microcomputer 901 ... Pachinko game machine 902 ... Game board 903 ... Game machine frame 904A ... Special symbol display device (first special symbol display device)
904B ... Special symbol display device (second special symbol display device)
905 ... Image display device 906A ... Winning ball device 906B ... Variable winning ball device 907 ... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R ... Speaker 909 ... Game effect lamp 9010 ... General winning opening 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice Control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 ... Ordinary symbol display 9021 ... Gate switch 9022A, 9022B ... Start switch 9023 ... Count switch 9030 ... Ball striking operation handle 9031A ... Stick controller 9031B ... Push button 9032 ... Movable body 90100 … Game control microcomputers 90101, 90121… ROM
90102, 90122 ... RAM
90103 ... CPU
90104, 90124 ... Random number circuit 90105, 90125 ... I / O
90120 ... CPU for production control
90123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state,
An operating means provided so that the initialization process can be executed based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.
A specific information storage means capable of storing specific information indicating that the operation means has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and a specific information storage means.
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value setting process for setting a set value related to a probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, the specific operation means is not determined to have been operated for each process. A process execution means that executes a process based on the determination that the information is stored, and
After the processing by the processing execution means is completed, the first variable display means that variably displays the identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area and derives and displays the display result.
After the processing by the processing execution means is completed, the second variable display means that variably displays the identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second start area and derives and displays the display result.
A hold storage means for storing hold information related to variable display of identification information that has not yet been started,
A state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the second starting region than in the normal state.
A promotion notification means capable of executing a promotion notification for promoting the passage of the game medium to the second starting region during a predetermined period controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state.
When the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the upper limit of the reserved information that can be stored in the reserved storage means in the predetermined period, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. Equipped with a means of notification,
The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification in the first aspect when the identification information is variably displayed by the first variable display means in the predetermined period, and the identification by the second variable display means in the predetermined period. When the information is variablely displayed, the promotion notification is executed in a second aspect different from the first aspect .
The arrival notification means is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information after the end of the advantageous state and the variable display of the first identification information after the end of the advantageous state. In some cases, the arrival notification is executed in a different manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images